JP2017042234A - Game system and game device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system capable of preventing a game hall from incurring damages by a fraudulent alteration of unit price information.SOLUTION: There is provided a game system including a game machine where games are played and a game device to be connected to the game machine. The game system includes: determination means for determining whether or not unit price information on the game machine side of a game value and unit price information on the game device side of the game value match each other, if a conversion instruction for converting the game value stored in the game machine to the game value stored in the game device is received; and unmatch time processing execution means for executing an unmatch time processing if the unit price information on the game machine side and the unit price information on the game device side are determined as unmatched by the determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming machine in which a game is performed and a gaming device connected to the gaming machine, and the gaming device.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are amusement stores that lend gaming media at a plurality of lending rates, and a sealed gaming machine that allows a player himself to select a desired lending rate among a plurality of lending rates (unit price information) is known. . In a gaming system including such an enclosed game machine and a pedestal card processing machine, the pedestal card processing machine obtains a rental rate from an enclosed game machine that can change the rental rate and stores it as set rate data. . When the inter-card processing machine detects a push operation of the ball lending button by the player, it identifies a value to be subtracted from the prepaid value based on the lending rate indicated in the set rate data, and subtracts it from the prepaid value. The number of game media corresponding to the value is lent (Patent Document 1).

JP2013-111409A

  However, in Patent Document 1, when the rental rate of the enclosed game machine is changed in a state where the rented game medium is present in the enclosed game machine, the inter-card card processing machine is newly changed. The set rate data is updated at the lending rate, and game media are lent out based on the updated set rate data, so that game media with a plurality of lending rates are mixed in the gaming machine. Thereafter, when the game medium of the gaming machine is counted and recorded as a possession ball on the card, it is counted at the changed rental rate. For this reason, there is a possibility that the gaming medium lent at the lending rate of 1 yen before the change is counted as a possession at the lending rate of 4 yen after the change, and there is a possibility that the gaming store will suffer a great loss.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system and a gaming apparatus capable of preventing a gaming store from losing money due to unauthorized change of unit price information. Is to provide.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game is performed (for example, an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), a slot machine without medals (S 2S), etc.) and a game connected to the gaming machine. A gaming system including a device (for example, CU3),
The gaming machine has game unit-side unit price information (for example, a game to play on the P unit 2) such as a game value (for example, game balls, game points, holding balls, holding points, or the number of stored balls) for playing. Game machine-side storage means (for example, the payout control board 17 of the payout control board 17) that stores the unit price of each ball (per one game point) (a monetary value such as 0.01 yen to 99.99 yen)) RAM)
The gaming device is a gaming device-side storage means (for example, a RAM of the CU control unit 323) for storing gaming device-side unit price information of a gaming value for playing with a gaming machine connected to the gaming device. With
When a conversion instruction for converting the gaming value (for example, a game ball) stored in the gaming machine into the gaming value (for example, a holding ball) stored in the gaming device is received (for example, on the P table 2 side) Judgment means for determining whether or not the gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming apparatus side unit price information coincide with the player pressing the counting button (for example, P table 2 (payout control board 17) CPU) compares the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the status information request command with the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 4 yen) stored in the P stand 2). ,
When the determination unit determines that the gaming machine unit unit price information and the gaming device unit unit price information do not match, the mismatch processing processing unit (for example, abnormally generates an error) A notification lamp and a display 312 for notification).

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that the gaming machine unit unit price information and the gaming device unit unit price information do not match, the mismatch processing is executed, so that the gaming store is changed by changing the unit price information. The loss can be prevented.

(2) Another configuration of the present invention relates to a gaming apparatus connected to a gaming machine (for example, a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), a medal-free slot machine (S 2S), etc.) (For example, CU3 etc.)
Game device side unit price information (for example, a ball unit price (for example, a ball unit price (for example, a game ball, a game point, a holding ball, a holding point, or the number of stored balls) for playing with a gaming machine connected to the gaming device) A storage means (for example, CU) for storing a unit price (per unit of game points) (a monetary value of 0.01 yen to 99.99 yen, etc.)) of game balls played on the P platform 2 RAM of the control unit 323),
A conversion instruction for converting a gaming value stored in the gaming machine into a gaming value stored in the gaming device (for example, a player presses a counting button on the P table 2 side), and the gaming machine It is determined that the stored gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming apparatus side unit price information do not match (for example, the gaming machine side unit price information is compared with the gaming apparatus side unit price information in the gaming apparatus). In addition to the case of determination, it also includes a case where it is determined whether the result of comparing the gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming device side unit price information is coincident or disagreement (for example, status information request) The processing at the time of discrepancy is executed on the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the command of No. and the ball unit price information stored in the P stand 2 (ball unit price = 4 yen, etc.). Mismatch processing execution means (for example, error Comprising a life and the like to the notification by the abnormality notifying lamp or display 312).

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that the gaming machine unit unit price information and the gaming device unit unit price information do not match, the mismatch processing is executed, so that the gaming store is changed by changing the unit price information. The loss can be prevented.

(3) In (1) above,
The determination means determines whether or not the gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming apparatus side unit price information match when a predetermined instruction other than the conversion instruction is received (for example, P units) 2 and CU3 perform determination at the time of power-on, card insertion, card return, winning, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, since the mismatch of the unit price information is determined except when the conversion instruction is accepted, it is possible to prevent the game store from losing money by changing the unit price information.

(4) In the above (1) or (3),
The gaming machine is
The determination means;
Transmission means for transmitting the determination result determined by the determination means to the gaming device (for example, P table 2 returns a response of a status information response including Bit3 = ON in fraud detection state 3 to CU3). Prepared,
The gaming device is:
Receiving means for receiving the determination result transmitted from the transmitting means (for example, the CU3 receives a response of a status information response including Bit3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3);
The mismatch processing execution means,
The mismatch processing execution means executes a predetermined notification as mismatch processing when the determination result received by the reception means does not match the gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming device side unit price information. (For example, the occurrence of an error is notified by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312 or the game is stopped).

  According to the above configuration, since the game machine includes the determination unit, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the gaming device.

(5) In the above (4),
The gaming apparatus further includes notification means (for example, an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312) for performing error notification (for example, addition error notification) regarding the state of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification executed by the non-matching process execution means has priority over the error notification performed by the notification means (for example, priority is to give some superiority or inferiority to a plurality of error notifications, for example, the order of display (For example, the unit price error is higher in error notification priority than the addition error, the error display is larger, etc.) than the addition error.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined notification is executed in preference to the error notification performed by the notification means, the game store is prevented from suffering a loss by notifying the store clerk with priority given to the change of the unit price information. can do.

(6) In (5) above,
Information that can specify the content of the predetermined notification executed by the non-matching process execution means and the content of the error notification performed by the notification means (for example, error occurrence time, identification information of CU3, error code, error content) (Bit information determined in advance) is output to a higher-level device connected to the gaming device (for example, information such as an error code due to a mismatch in unit price of balls is transmitted to the hall server 801).

  According to the above configuration, the content of the error notification is output to the host device, so that all errors can be displayed and the errors that have occurred can be grasped in a list.

(7) In the above (1), (3) to (6),
The gaming machine continues processing based on the conversion instruction to the gaming device until the determining means determines that the gaming machine side unit price information matches the gaming device side unit price information. (For example, in the case of an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, counting is performed without sending a response of a state information response including information on the number of counting balls (for example, 125 balls) converted by the counting instruction until the ball unit price information matches. If the pachinko gaming machine is a non-enclosed circulation type pachinko machine that continues to send a response of the status information response including the number of balls = 0, it continues to hold the count of pachinko gaming machines in each counter. Such).

  According to the above configuration, since the response information including the gaming value information converted by the conversion instruction is continuously transmitted to the gaming device until the unit price information matches, the game is performed in an abnormal state. Therefore, there is no need to give a conversion instruction again.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko game machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko game machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card | curd is inserted in the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when paying out and holding out a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count history data memorize | stored by P units. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which transmits the game information in which P units are changing to CU. It is a figure for demonstrating the conditions which discard the game information in the fluctuation | variation transmitted from P units by CU. It is a figure for demonstrating another condition which discards the game information in the fluctuation | variation transmitted from P units by CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads the count log | history memorize | stored in P units to CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the unauthorized ball detection process at the time of an addition request | requirement. It is a figure which shows an example of the unauthorized ball unit price detection process at the time of a count request | requirement. It is a figure which shows an example of the fraudulent ball detection process at the time of CU replacement | exchange. It is a figure which shows an example of the fraudulent ball detection process at the time of P vehicle replacement | exchange. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating the opportunity of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU control part 323 and security chip (SC) 325b. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of CU control part 323, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power-on / normal start-up of the CU control part 323. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation of CU control part 323, and factory shipment. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a security board | substrate information inquiry 2 sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) time-out sequence of the security board information inquiry information. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Embodiments according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machines>
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) may be abbreviated as an enclosed circulation pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine) as an example of a game machine. ) 2 is attached. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2 at a side position on the predetermined side of the P table 2. Yes. Note that the card unit is taken as an example of the gaming apparatus according to the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2 encloses a pachinko ball (game ball) as an example of a game medium inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25 to drive the launch motor 18 (see FIG. 4). It is configured so that a game can be played by hitting balls one by one into the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The firing strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as the firing strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the handle operating amount), and the handle operating amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P stand 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type pachinko gaming machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (a slotted pattern), so that the probability variation big hit state And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won in any of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  The P base 2 is fitted with a connection surface 54 a provided on the front surface of the P base 2 by installing the CU 3 in a lateral position to extend the indicator 54 extending from the CU 3. Therefore, a display 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the P table 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player. The display 54 is fitted to the P base 2 by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54 b provided on the connection surface 54 a of the P base 2. Thus, if it is the structure which fits the indicator 54 of CU3 to the connection surface 54a of P stand 2, CU3 and P stand 2 can be connected more strongly and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54 from being released unless the glass door 6 or the lower door provided with the hitting operation handle 25 is opened. The display 54 is not limited to the structure formed integrally with the CU 3 and fitted to the connection surface 54a of the P base 2 as shown in FIG. 1, but is formed independently from the CU 3 and is formed on the front surface of the P base 2. The structure which can be attached may be sufficient.

  In addition, a game ball number display for displaying the number of game balls is provided above the connection surface 54a of the P stand 2. The game ball number display 29 is composed of a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171 described later. The game ball number display 29 displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like. The game ball number display 29 is not limited to a 7-segment LED display, and may be a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  Furthermore, a counting button 28 for counting the game balls to the holding balls is provided at the left side of the game ball number display 29 on the P stand 2. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or the counting button 28 is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  Thus, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P table 2 side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table 2 can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU 3 side. . In addition, the P platform 2 is provided with speakers 270 for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278 at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27. In addition, the position and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1, and the position and the number may be changed as necessary.

  The P stand 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and other front frames (game frames) 5. In particular, the game board 26 is different for each model of pachinko gaming machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board 26 when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU 3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to general players who have not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU 3 that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the data of the game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU 3, there are provided a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a card insertion / discharge port 309 for inserting member cards and visitor cards, and the like. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  On the front side of the CU 3, when a member card is received, the display unit 312 is identified by a member card ID (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded on the member card and a member card ID. A replay button 319 for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls is provided.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the P stand 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. When the hall server 801 stores the card number in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801 may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding balls in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored at regular intervals every time the counting button 28 is operated and counting processing is performed, for example. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from CU3, the possession ball stored in CU3 is temporarily stored in the hall server 801 as a stored ball, and the day when the player receives the card return When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3 again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321, and a card return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the CU 3. The IR photosensitive unit 320 is an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant at a game arcade, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion−the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, the P base 2 is opened and closed with respect to the frame-like outer frame 4 by a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with the left side edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b. Move and become locked.

  Then, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), thereby a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a against the biasing force of the spring, 6b is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engaging protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engaging protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. As a result of getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be in a locked state. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame open detection switch 13 is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4 in a lower part of the front frame 5 and it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in the upper part of the front frame 5, and the glass door open detection switch 12 detects that the glass door 6 has been opened.

  The number of opening times of the glass door opening detection switch 12 and the front frame opening detection switch 13 is counted by a counter (not shown). The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power source even when the power supply of the P stand 2 is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P base 2.

  A main control board 16 is provided on the back surface of the game board 26 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4 is closed, the main control board 16 becomes detachable from the game board 26 by first opening the front frame 5 and removing the game board 26 from the front frame 5. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16 from the game board 26 or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16, it is necessary to open the front frame 5. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16 is illegally removed from the game board 26 or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16 is illegally exchanged, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17 is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 after first opening the front frame 5. Therefore, if the dispensing control board 17 is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 or the semiconductor chip provided on the dispensing control board 17 is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 is demonstrated. FIG. 3 is a view showing the game board 26 before and after being attached to the front frame 5. As shown in FIG. 3, attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5 so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b have a U-shaped shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26. By pushing the game board 26 into the front frame 5 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 3B, the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 3A. When the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26 is installed in the front frame 5, the convex drawer connector 32 is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33, so that the main control board 16 on the game board 26 side and the payout control board on the front frame 5 side are combined. 17 is connected. Further, the game board 26 is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33. In addition, even if it is the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 only by the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33, without providing the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26 and the front frame 5. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the main control board 16 via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26, and the concave drawer connector 33 is a payout shown in FIG. 2 via the signal cable 36. It is connected to the control board 17.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3 and the P stand 2. With reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of CU3 and P stand 2 is demonstrated.

  The CU 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is a main control function unit of the CU 3, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 5) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323 is a security board (SC board) 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the P table 2 while ensuring security. The security board 325 is a security monitoring function unit of the CU3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security board 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a board different from the security board 325. The CU 3 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the P stand 2 side, and the P stand 2 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the CU 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example. The connection between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described with respect to an embodiment in which wiring is electrically connected via a connector. However, necessary information (for example, identification information or addition) between the CU 3 and the P base 2 is described. As long as the information on the number of balls is communicable, any connection method such as wired or wireless is acceptable.

  The security board 325 on the CU 3 side and the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the P base 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P-unit 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 5) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by an attendant at the game hall, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded in the inserted card into the CU control unit 323, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the display 312 provided on the front face of the CU 3 and the display 54 arranged on the front face of the P stand 2 as shown in FIG. The display data transmitted to the display 54 is first input to the relay board 14. The display 312 and the display 54 display images corresponding to the display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be configured so as to be provided in the P platform 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  The P base 2 has a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2, a payout control board 17 that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 A launch control board 31, a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 that controls the display of the variable display device 278 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball wins each start winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control unit 161 draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further including a small hit) / off and stores the random number. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is “4”, for example. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as commands.

  The variable display command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / out), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the production control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 of the CU3. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display unit 54. Is possible. The relay board 14 and the display 54 may be provided on the P platform 2 side. In this case, the effect control board 15 on the P table 2 side is directly connected to the relay board 14 on the P table 2 side without going through the CU 3.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, a firing ball detection switch 903, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33A, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are provided on the payout control board 17 in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. The ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the P base 2 and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the table 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P unit 2 is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33A, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the CU 3 and the payout control board 17 of the P stand 2 are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 as described later. On the contrary, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 5 is provided with a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number display 29. The game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 5, but it may be attached to the front frame 5 like an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko gaming machine in which balls are paid out. And may be provided in such a manner that it can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54. The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18 of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19 detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19 detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19 is output to the payout control board 17 and the CU 3 via the launch control board 31.

  A display 54 and a relay board 14 extending from the CU 3 are provided on the front surface of the P base 2. The display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 via the relay board 14. Further, the display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The relay board 14 outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 to the display 54 and outputs the display control signal to the display 54 based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350. A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54 extending from the CU 3 provided on the front surface of the P base 2 is configured to be controlled on the CU 3 side, but instead, the display 54 on the P base 2 side is configured. Or a display control board on the P base 2 side so that display control can be performed on the P base 2 side. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

  The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for erasing gaming machine information and game information stored in the RAM of the P unit 2, and after the P unit enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 4, the circulation route of the pachinko ball in the P stand 2 will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The detection of the play of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is changed from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 4) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27, the out balls that have entered the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701 provided in the middle. . The foul balls flow down through the foul ball return path and are detected by a foul ball detection switch 33A provided in the middle of the foul balls.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, the winning ball, the out ball, and the foul ball are all detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903 is a switch that detects all of the bullets that have been bulleted. When the number detected by the switch and the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the pachinko balls that have been driven are collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of shots detected by the shot ball detection switch 903 and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference is not zero, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have not been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27 is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification processing for abnormalities occurring in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification process when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 5, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 5 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU 3. is there. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325 of the CU 3, the CU control part 323 detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323 and the security board 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal indicating that (an abnormality notification signal). The security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 with a parallel signal via the PIF circuit 326 which is a parallel interface circuit. In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of the fact via the PIF circuit 326, while when detecting an abnormality of the payout control unit 171. To the CU control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 via the PIF circuit 326 notifies the main control board 16 accordingly. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU 3 side and the P stand 2 side and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 6, main data among various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3 side and the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2 side and a transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount).

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P base 2 side. First, when the power supply is turned on for the first time when the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2 and the CU (card unit) 3 are electrically connected after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P unit 2 side 17 has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side. Note that the communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 is performed via the security board 325 (communication control ICs 325a and SC 325b) and the PIF circuit 326 as shown in FIG. Data, communication commands, and the like communicated between each other are relayed by the security board 325 (communication control ICs 325a and SC325b) and the PIF circuit 326. Therefore, for example, if communication between the communication control IC 325a and the SC 325b occurs and communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 cannot be performed, the CU control unit 323 transmits a status information request command to the SC 325b in the CU 3. Does not reach P stand 2.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. “Normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission on the CU3 side (primary station side) with an initial value “1”. However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. P station 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2 requests the CU 3 to count game balls.

  Only the CU3 has the right to update the normal serial number. When the normal serial number that is the same as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3 backs up and stores the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3 has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3 transmits an addition sequence number added to the addition sequence number that has been used for communication until then to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P-unit 2 has the counting update number addition update right. When making a request for counting, the P platform 2 transmits a counting sequence number added to the counting sequence number used for communication to the CU 3 until then. When CU3 accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, with regard to “normal serial number”, a configuration will be described in which the serial number received by the CU 3 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each of the P base 2 and the CU 3 or the serial number received by the P base 2 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1), and the other is the received serial number. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest gaming machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. The latest gaming machine information is stored in the latest gaming machine information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 4) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. Note that the number of game balls is not included in the latest game machine information, and is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side as a count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest gaming machine information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154, and the total number of balls of the out ball and the safe ball means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, and counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, those count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, and counting ball counter values as the latest gaming machine information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the data of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the gaming machine information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before, are backed up in the storage area of the previous gaming machine information (game machine information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that has not been transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. The number of game balls transmitted immediately before may be added to the previous gaming machine information and stored.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls stored, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of cards possessed by the latest gaming machine information transmitted from the P unit 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification lamp or indicator 312 is used to notify an error, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image that prohibits the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko gaming machine provided with each counter.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU (card unit) 3 and P stand (pachinko game machine) 2 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 7 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 after the CU 3 completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the CU 3 transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission sequence number” is the sequence number of the command for requesting the state information last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the last final transmission serial number (serial number) when the status information response is received at the CU3 and when the status information response is received at the CU3. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2 and the CU 3 side when receiving the status information response to the CU 3 when the P unit 2 transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P table 2, “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325 in the counting history sequence described later, and “store code” held in the P table 2 And the coincidence determination with “SC board ID” is performed, and if they coincide, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3 and sets the count request ball count = 0 to the subtraction register when the CU 3 has not performed the count process for the count request. The user program executed on the P platform 2 is notified. If CU3 has already performed the counting process, the count request ball number notified to CU3 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. When all the store codes held by the P platform 2 are “F” (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match. When the “store code” notified from the security board 325 and the “store code” held by the P platform 2 do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. Note that when the P machine 2 receives a recovery request command from the CU 3, the P machine 2 notifies the user program side via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2 with respect to the CU 3. Recovery information includes “Serial Number”, “Command”, “Last Last Sending Serial Number”, “Last Inserted Card ID”, “Previous Card Insertion Time”, “Last Last Sending Additional Serial Number”, “Last Last Unit Price”, “Game” It includes “information storage presence / absence”, “previous gaming machine information”, and “previous gaming information”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Previous unit price” refers to the unit price per ball (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) played on the P unit 2 held by the P unit 2 when the CU 3 and the P unit 2 were previously connected. It is. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  The “previous gaming machine information” is gaming machine information previously notified to the CU 3 and includes information on “number of gaming balls”, “game ball information”, “count requesting ball count”, and “counting serial number”. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls previously notified to the CU 3, the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the total number of prize balls. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous game information” is the game information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3. The game information n includes, for example, the type information notified to the CU 3 last time, game prize ball information, and the like.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number that is stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 when the state information request is received at the CU 3 and when the status information request is received at the P base 2.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2, the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325 in the counting history sequence described later, the “store code” held by the P board 2, and A match with “SC board ID” is determined, and if the “store code” does not match, the recovery data is not processed. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “game information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, the previous “game ball number”, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “ The recovery data held by the P table 2 is set in the “counting serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “0” is set in the “counting serial number” and the previous “number of game information”. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. When all the store codes held by the P platform 2 are “F” (hexadecimal), it is determined that the store codes match.

  If it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325 and the store code held by the P platform 2 do not match, the card is processed as having no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “last inserted card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P base 2 stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the last final transmission serial number. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission serial number = 0 is notified. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted serial number stored is notified.

  The P table 2 stores the counting sequence number as the last transmission counting sequence number at the time of transmission of the status information response. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the SC 325b do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission count serial number is notified as 0. When the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 match the information held in the P units, the last last transmission count serial number stored is notified.

  In addition, when the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2 is not performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using the previous gaming machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the previous gaming machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the additional recovery information to the P unit 2 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “additional number of balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3 determines that it is necessary to perform the additional ball recovery process in the P stand 2. The CU 3 compares the “previous last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery response received from the P unit 2 with the “previous final transmission addition serial number” stored in the CU 3, and if they match, the additional ball recovery is performed. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and the “addition ball number” is the game ball This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P base 2 will be described in detail. The recovery process of the P unit 2 is based on the recovery request 2 and, if the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the CU 3 has not been performed, This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is for notifying the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information at the P unit 2 and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2 is in a state where the number of additional balls cannot be received, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When performing the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2, if the P unit 2 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3. , The number of balls to be added notified from CU3 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. When the number of added balls notified from CU3 = 0, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and the process OK is returned to CU3. However, when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), if the gaming machine state 1 responds with a game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in response to the state information, “recovery” is sent to CU3. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU 3 is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P unit 2, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to CU3. If “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from CU3 = 0, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register regardless of the number of additional balls notified from CU3, and the user program is notified to CU3. The process OK is returned.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU 3 is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P base 2 is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  The communication start request command notifies the P unit 2 that communication has started normally. Receiving the communication start request, the P base 2 clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3 sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2 also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response to the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3 clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 that the communication has ended normally, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop the communication and wait for the restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes “serial number”, “command”, “CU state”, “additional ball number”, “additional serial number”, “counting serial number”, “ball unit price”, and “counting receipt time”. Is included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3 notified to the P base 2, and indicates that a card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and no card is inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of CU3.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the P unit 2 of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. Note that when the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with a status information response as the number of all playing game balls being held.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of “preparing for card return” for a certain time (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P table 2 has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it has received a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3 by counting the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit4 notifies P stand 2 that the receipt has been completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. When receiving the counting ball reception completion, the P stand 2 checks whether the counting sequence number is the same as that of the P stand 2, and if it does not match, notifies the CU 3 without subtracting the number of game balls.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit 5 notifies P stand 2 of the state of waiting for card removal from CU 3. When Bit 6 is “1”, the count cannot be received, and “0” indicates that the count can be received. Bit6 notifies the gaming machine of the count receiving state of CU3. The P platform 2 uses the information of Bit 6 for determination of “count request” in the status information response message. Bit 7 is not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

  The “ball unit price” is a unit price per ball (or one point) of game value (game balls, game points, holding balls, holding points, number of stored balls, etc.) for playing on the P platform 2 (0.01 points). Currency value such as yen to 99.99 yen). The “ball unit price” is set by a higher-level device (for example, a communication box (T-BOX) or a hall server 801) connected to the CU3, and when communication between the higher-level device and the CU3 is online, the higher-level device transmits the CU3. Will be notified. The CU 3 stores the information of the notified unit price (CU side unit price) in the RAM of the CU control unit 323 at the timing when the unit unit price is notified from the host device. When communication with the host device is offline, the CU 3 reads information on the unit price stored in advance in the CU 3, and sets the read information on the unit price in the CU 3. On the other hand, when the number of game balls is 0 (zero), the P table 2 stores information on the ball unit price (P unit side unit price) included in the message notified from the CU 3 in the RAM of the payout control board 17. Set. The unit price set for P 2 is not changeable when the number of game balls is other than 0 (zero) balls, and cannot be changed until the next game ball number becomes 0 (zero) balls. To do. The unit price set for CU3 is changed based on a new unit price notified to CU3 from the host device.

  Note that the ball unit price (P unit side unit price) at the P unit 2 is determined by a predetermined operation (for example, inputting the unit unit price in the setting menu, setting the unit unit price using the DIP switch, etc.) The information of the unit price may be set and stored. Moreover, CU3 memorize | stores and sets the information of the ball unit price (CU side ball unit price) the same as the unit price set with P stand 2 to connect. Further, the information of the ball unit price stored in the CU 3 is set even if it is individually set by an operation different from the P stand 2 (for example, the ball unit price is set by a dip switch provided in the CU 3). The information on the ball unit price may be set to the unit price of the P unit 2 and the CU 3 by transmitting from one to the other in the communication exchange between the P unit 2 and the CU 3.

  The ball unit price stored in each of the P units 2 and CU3 is essentially the same, but the unit price of the P unit 2 or CU3 is changed due to fraud, or a different unit price is set due to an installation error or setting error. In such a case, the unit prices stored in the P stand 2 and the CU 3 may not match. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the unit price stored in each of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 matches. Specifically, illegal ball unit price detection when a game ball addition request is made (see FIG. 23), illegal ball unit price detection when the count button is pressed (see FIG. 24), and illegal ball unit price detection during unit replacement (see FIG. 25). ) And fraudulent ball unit price detection at the time of gaming machine replacement (FIG. 26), etc., to determine whether or not the ball unit price matches. In addition, you may determine whether the ball unit price memorize | stored in each of P stand 2 and CU3 corresponds at timings other than this. For example, the P base 2 and the CU 3 may perform the determination at the timing of power-on, card insertion, card return, winning, etc.

  In order to determine whether or not the unit price stored in each of the P units 2 and CU3 is the same, the unit price information stored in the CU3 is included in the command for requesting the state information and the P unit 2 Will be notified. As will be described in detail below, the notification of the ball unit price information from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 is not included in the response of the status information response corresponding to the command of the status information request in order to ensure security, but only at the time of the recovery response CU3 is notified. On the other hand, the information on the ball unit price stored in the P platform 2 is included in the response of the recovery response and notified to the CU 3 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the recovery information for returning from the communication disabled state is requested from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 (recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3) as the predetermined condition, the P unit 2 The ball unit price is set in the response and sent to CU3. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying the CU 3 at the time of recovery response. The unit price stored in the P stand 2 is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3 and is transmitted to the CU 3. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the ball unit price of the game balls played on the P stand 2 before the recovery, and the player can be resumed with an appropriate game value after the recovery. In addition, the ball unit price stored in the P stand 2 is not output to the outside other than notifying the CU 3 at the time of the recovery response, thereby ensuring security so that the unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2 prohibits overwriting a new unit price when the P unit 2 holds the number of game balls. In addition, even when the P unit 2 holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the unit price stored in the P unit 2 is permitted, and the stored number of game balls is converted into the overwritten unit price and displayed. May be configured to update.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P device 2 of the time when the CU 3 received the counting request from the P device 2, and the CU state Bit4 (game ball number reception response) is “1” ( It is valid only when it is completed. The information of “count reception time” is notified to the P platform 2 but processed only in the CPU of the payout control unit 171 and may be stored in a RAM or the like accessible from the outside without being notified to the user program. Absent. Therefore, the information of “count reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171, so that security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the state information response includes the latest gaming machine information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “gaming machine state”, “fraud detection information” and “gaming information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3 by using the “total prize ball number”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU 3. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data for the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, CU3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards held. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28 is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the number of counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is information on the launch strength of a game ball.
The “gaming machine state” indicates the state of the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and “gaming machine state 1”, “gaming machine state 2”, “ It includes information on “gaming machine state 3” and “gaming machine error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming machine state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. The game is in progress (a state in which the fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball and the game is in the state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operating handle 25) is touched (touch sensor touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that if the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped, the P platform 2 times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the game machine ball cannot be confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the P stand 2 has stopped firing the ball, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2 is set in a state where the whereabouts of the game ball is fixed (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3 and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P machine 2 makes an addition NG response, it notifies the addition serial number without updating it. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming machine state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming machine state 3” represents the big hit during the game state information + short time, and “1” is set during the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming machine error state” indicates an error code that is occurring on the P machine 2 and expresses each error code using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When “0”, only an alert is issued, and when “1”, an alert + output to the hall server 801 is indicated.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and includes “fraud detection state 1” and “fraud detection state 2” , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit 1 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that an iron ball is detected in the circulating ball in the game board when “1”. Bit 2 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that a small ball is detected in the circulating ball in the game board when “1”. Bit 3 of “injustice detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the P unit 2 detects that the unit price is illegal. Bit 5 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit previously connected to the P unit 2 is the development CU 3D (development CU connection). Bit 6 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit previously connected to the P stand 2 is the game board development jig 3E (game board development jig connection). . Bit 7 in “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the gaming machine connected when “1” is the gaming machine simulator 2A (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit1 to Bit4 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. If they do not match, the game ball of another store is mixed with the game ball, and Bit0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to CU3. The ball unit price fraud detection is performed by determining whether or not the ball unit price information included in the status information request command from the CU 3 matches the ball unit price information stored in the P platform 2. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the unit price of the ball has been changed illegally, and Bit3 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to CU3. Communication between the CU 3 and the P platform is performed via the security board 325 (communication control ICs 325a and SC 325b) and the PIF circuit 326 as described above. Therefore, in CU3, the CU control unit 323 transmits a status information request command including information on the unit price of balls to the P base 2 via the SC 325b, and the determination result in the P base 2 ("Bit3 of" illegal detection state 3 "is" 1 ″) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323 via the SC 325b. Of course, even if CU3 and P stand communicate directly, CU3 and P stand may communicate via at least one of security board 325 (communication control IC 325a and SC325b) and PIF circuit 326. .

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”. , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of winnings, which shows the number of winnings (cumulative) for each type information of the gaming machine information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of winnings. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning holes 275, 276, and 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card insertion response is a response indicating that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU3.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted into the CU 3 and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1) of CU3. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by the P stand 2 is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3 has been moved to the store. The CU 3 stores a store code where the CU 3 is installed. The store code is added to the security board 325 and notified to the P units. “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether or not CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified by adding information from the security board 325 to the P board 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The “store code” and “SC board ID” are not notified to the user program side and are deleted in the payout control circuit.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 of CU3, or a card is notified to the P stand 2 as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P base 2 backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of CU3 being in the state of card insertion (bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P unit 2 ), The P stand 2 transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322 of the CU 3 is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2, and the P base 2 clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P stand 2 receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of the card return, and the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU 3 performs a membership card insertion, a general card insertion, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3 at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3 and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Count history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A count history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This count history request command is for requesting a count history to the P base 2. In response to this counting history request, a response of counting history response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of the count history response is to notify the CU 3 of the count history.

  The count history request command requests a count history from the P base 2, and the CU 3 transmits it to the P base 2 in a count history sequence after the authentication sequence. The count history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. The store code is added to the security board 325 and notified to the P units. “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether or not CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified by adding information from the security board 325 to the P board 2.

  A process for detecting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID will be described. The SC board ID includes an identification code and a shipping manufacturer code. The P units recognize connected units (commercial CU3, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping manufacturer code included in the SC board ID.

  Specifically, the case where the P unit detects whether or not the unit to be connected is a connection device other than the commercial CU 3 (specifically, a development unit or a game board development jig) will be described. When the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected to the unit (CU3) used for commercial use after that, the game balls given during development This causes a problem that allows a game to be played during commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P platform 2 detects whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  In order to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when the P-unit 2 is connected to the unit, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request and the count history request The shipping manufacturer code of the later SC board ID is compared. First, if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “None”, the development unit or the game board development jig is detected regardless of the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request. do not do. Even if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request matches the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, when the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history and the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history match the upper byte, but the lower byte is different, it is detected as a development unit. Also, the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code other than the game board development jig Also detected as a development unit. If the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code of the game board development jig, the game board Detect with development jig.

  The P stand 2 stores the detection that the development unit has been connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to “1”, and the detection that the game board development jig has been connected to the recovery register. This bit is memorized by setting Bit 5 to “1”.

  If the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “none”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2 is a unit newly connected after the recovery process is performed. The shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID is overwritten. When the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “present”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2 is subjected to the recovery process if there is no game ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit is overwritten. However, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P table 2 is the same as the shipment maker code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit after the recovery process if there is a game ball to be recovered. Prohibit overwriting. It should be noted that the prohibition state of overwriting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P unit 2 (especially clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwriting of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID when there are game balls, the number of game balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of game balls that can be played by the connected commercial unit thereafter. This can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3, and the P base 2 receives the counting history request command and transmits the counting history information stored in the P base 2 to the CU 3. . The count history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “count history result”, “count history 1”, and “count history 2”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Counting history result” is information indicating whether or not the counting history is stored in the P table 2 by the counting history processing in the P table 2. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3 side as the counting request ball number from the P table 2 side during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. "Card ID", "Counting receipt time" included when receiving a count receipt response (count response ON) from CU3, and the cumulative number of count balls paid out until the count request OFF state "cumulative count balls" It also includes information on “number”. Note that the P machine 2 holds the history of the past two times (the history of the number of game balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is one time).

  In the count history result, “0x00” indicates that there is no history, “0x01” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 1), and “0x02” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 2).

  “Counting history 1” is the most recent history (final counting) of the past two histories, and includes information on “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number”. Is included. “Card ID” is identification information of the card inserted into the CU 3 at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3 receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P unit 2. The “cumulative counting ball number” is the cumulative number of counting balls counted during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held in the P table 2 at the end of counting.

  “Counting history 2” is an old history (counting immediately before the last counting) of the past two times, and includes “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball”. Contains number information. The information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number” is the same type of information as included in “counting history 1”, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P platform 2 to the CU 3 will be described. When the P store 2 matches the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3 in the counting history sequence, The “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” are included in the response of the counting history response and output to the CU 3. Further, if the “store code” stored in the count history request command received from the CU 3 matches the “store code” stored in the P table 2, the count history response is returned even if the “SC board ID” is different. Including “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response to the CU3. This takes into account changing the combination of P unit 2 and CU 3 in the store, and if it is in the same store, it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P unit 2 is transferred to another CU 3 Is not given.

  However, if the P store 2 is different from the “store code” held in the “store code” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3, the “P substrate ID” matches the count history. It is prohibited to include the “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response of the response and output to the CU 3. Even if the same CU3 is moved to another store, even if it is connected to the P stand 2 holding the same “SC board ID”, if the counting history data is taken over, it is disadvantageous to the other store. It is because there is a possibility of giving.

  Of course, when the P stand 2 is not connected to the CU 3 but connected to the game board development jig or the development unit, or when it is not connected to any unit, the count history data stored in the P stand 2 is output. There is no. By restricting the output of the counting history data, the security of the game machine including the P machine 2 and the P machine 2 is enhanced.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3 is the primary station and the P stand 2 is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of CU3.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 8 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a count history request command including a serial number = 255 to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 returns a response of the counting history response including the serial number = 255, the counting history result indicating the presence / absence of the history, and the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3. Next, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2 and requests recovery information from the P unit 2. The P unit 2 refers to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU 3 and executes count recovery processing. Specifically, the P-unit 2 refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3 has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3 has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2 returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous gaming machine information, and the like.

  When the CU3 that has received the recovery response has not executed the process of the last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information, the CU3 performs the recovery process of the CU3 using the previous gaming machine information included in the recovery information. When the addition ball recovery process is performed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 to the P base 2 and transmits recovery data to the P base 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3 (recovery response 2). When the P stand 2 cannot receive the additional balls, the recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is not only executed at power-on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when a response with the same serial number is notified from the P unit 2. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the received serial number as it is. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2 returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3 as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2 with the serial number “2”. The P base 2 returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number to “4”, and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2. The status information request command includes information on the unit price of the balls. By transmitting the ball unit price to the P unit 2, the P unit 2 can recognize whether the unit unit price set by the CU 3 is 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball. In addition, since the status information request command is transmitted in a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information on the unit price of balls up to three times to the P stand 2 during a cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is fired. is there. Therefore, it is possible to change the ball unit price for each game ball played on the P stand 2. If the unit price can be managed for each game ball in a small number (for example, one ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play a game slowly with a small amount, or the remaining number of game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games tailored to the demand for consumption. The command of the status information request transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 described below includes the ball unit price information, but is not clearly described when the information of the unit price is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described.

  In response to this, the P table 2 updates the gaming machine information, the gaming information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time the response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2 returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “4”. The response of the status information response does not include information on the unit price of the ball. This is to prevent illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played on the P stand 2 and transmitting it to the CU 3 and illegally executing the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3. . As a result, the security of the gaming system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P base 2, and the P base 2 sends the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 shown in FIG. 9 transmits a command for status information request including the serial number = n and the card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2 before the card is inserted. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the game prohibition to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, in CU3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer (such as a card ID) may be stored in the CU3.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the middle of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the hall server 801 about the holding ball, storage ball, remaining card amount, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, a status information request including serial number = n + 1, card return ready state = OFF Is sent to the P-unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data in the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card being inserted. . The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3, thereby indicating that the game is being permitted. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4 and the card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 responds to the status information response including the serial number = n + 4 and the game permission. Is returned to CU3.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including the serial number = n + x, the card ID, the card insertion time, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2 does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2 can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3 without backing up the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3 also does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323. As a result, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P unit 2 during card insertion, and the fraudulent act such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P unit 2 can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 10, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of additional balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During the addition display, the display unit 54 displays that 125 balls are withdrawn from the remaining amount and added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3 counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And since the P stand 2 notifies CU3 of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 11, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319 in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the possession balls or the storage balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of depressing the possession ball payout button or the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3 notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of addition balls = 125 to the P stand 2 after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, CU3 displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and issues a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P-station 2. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU3. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 12 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 12, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. .

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  In response to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P unit 2. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 2 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 12, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28 once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3. It has been transmitted to the P stand 2.

  When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to the P base 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display on the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, the count request state of the P base 2 is OFF, but since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2 transmits a second count request to the CU 3. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P base 2 does not perform counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls, and updates the display of balls to 200. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to CU3. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  The CU 3 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is complete. Although not shown, the CU 3 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return ready state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2 with the game ball remaining and inserts a store card into one of them and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2 and the CU 3 communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Then, with reference to FIG. 13, the automatic counting process of the game ball at the time of a store closing is demonstrated.

  FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3 is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2 recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3. Then, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n, the CU opening state = ON, the card insertion state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3.

  When closing is set at the game hall where the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the status information, and the fact that the game ball remains in the P stand 2 indicates that the status information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including the serial number = n + 1, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2. In other words, the P card 2 is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of CU3 at the card insertion time = 0. Since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3 in this manner, the store clerk does not need to go around the P table 2 where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2 recognizes that a card has been inserted into the CU 3 and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the CU opening state OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2.

  Note that the closing setting in the game hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323 distributes a closing command to the CU 3 from the hall management computer or the hall server 801 installed in the game hall, so that the CU control unit 323 has the game hall. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801, a closing command for closing the store is distributed to each CU3. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3 at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323 may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU 3 is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), the time after the predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed (for example, 10:20) When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3 transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2.

  In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A state information response including “” is transmitted to CU3. That is, since the P-unit 2 requests the CU 3 to count the remaining game balls, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count-up, and the last final transmission count Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3 which received it adds count ball number = 50 sent from P stand 2 to the number of balls. It should be noted that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3 backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3 returns to the P stand 2 in order to notify receipt of the counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return ready state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2. The counting balls received from the P stand 2 are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3 as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P-unit 2 that has received it, the counted number of balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. The P stand 2 subtracts the number of balls from the number of game balls, and there is no remaining game balls (number of game balls = 0) to notify that a count request is unnecessary (count request state OFF). = N + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the counting sequence number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the status information response including the counting request = OFF is transmitted to the CU3.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in CU3 is performed. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2 in order to notify the P unit 2 that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into CU3 has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including serial number = n + 4, card ID = 0, and card insertion time = 0 to CU3.

  Next, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion status = OFF to the P base 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting sequence number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU3.

  As described above, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage unit of CU3. Note that the CU 3 may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the hall server 801 together with the identification information of the P stand 2 or the CU 3. In the hall server 801, by storing the number of possessed balls sent from the CU 3 for each date, P stand 2 or CU 3, it becomes possible to return the retained balls to the player at a later date. In addition, the CU 3 may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the hall server 801 in association with the counted number of remaining balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the closing process in the case where a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2 has been described. However, the closing process in the case where a card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same processing as the processing of “card return” ”(see FIG. 15) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28 or may automatically perform the counting process according to the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of count history data stored in the P table 2 will be described. FIG. 14 is a sequence diagram for explaining the processing of the counting history data stored in the P table 2. In FIG. 14, the initial number of game balls is 600. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n (not shown), a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. In the P platform 2, the player operates the counting button 28 from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the status information request command until the response to the status information request command is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P stand 2, the response of the state information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of game balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. Here, in the P table 2, the counting request is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, so that the processing of the counting history is started. Specifically, the P table 2 uses the history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3 side as the number of counting request balls from the P table 2 side between the counting request ON state and the counting request OFF state as a counting history for one time. Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of count requests, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the first count request as the first count request. Thereafter, as the second count request, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the second count history. Although depending on the period during which the count button 28 is pressed, a response to a status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is received between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. Returned to CU3. The count history to be stored includes the “card ID” at the time of the count request, the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3, and the number of balls that have been paid up to the count request OFF state. The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P unit 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100 and collates the number of gaming balls, and if it is 500 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are confirmed. . Then, the display of the game ball number display 29 is updated from 600 to 500. Further, when the player continues to operate the counting button 28, the P table 2 has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number = m + 2, the number of counting balls = 100, and a counting request. A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to CU3. Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 2 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2 subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and compares the number of game balls, and if it is 400 balls, determines the temporarily fixed 100 balls. . Then, the display of the game ball number display 29 is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28 by the player is finished, the P stand 2 has the serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of game balls = 400, the counting serial number = m + 3, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request. A response of a status information response including = OFF is returned to CU3. When the P table 2 is changed to the counting request OFF state, the counting history stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number”. Further, the P stand 2 stores the number of game balls when the counting request is changed to the OFF state as the “number of game balls” at the end of counting in the counting history 1. Further, the P base 2 stores “count reception time” included in the state information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3 in the count history 1. When a new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2 and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, since the history for the past two times is stored in the P platform 2, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past one time or the history for the past three times or more is stored. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to recover the number of game balls counted by storing the counting history, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the recovery processing by storing a plurality of past pieces.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 15, the number of cards held by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game machine, the player presses the “card return” button. However, at the time when the player presses the “card return” button, the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is 800 balls, and the CU 3 determines that the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is not 0. In addition, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU 3 sets the card return ready state = ON, the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2 is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3 displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54 or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28 to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2 determines that the counting operation for depressing the counting button 28 is a counting operation with the card return preparation state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of the counting ball number 800 balls obtained by batch counting the 800 ball balls, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, a game ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a count request message, the P platform 2 counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, CU3 adds 800 counting balls to the number of holding balls, and subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 gaming balls to 0. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data of the updated last transmission count sequence number. Then, in order to notify receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening state = ON, card return preparation state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3, the P stand 2 subtracts 800 counting balls from the 800 gaming balls and displays 0 gaming balls on the display 54 or the like. Further, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 that the number of game balls is 0 and the counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to CU3. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to CU3 without counting up.

  CU3 counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28 and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3, the card ID and the card insertion time data held on the payout control board 17 are cleared.

  In response, the CU 3 determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P-unit 2 match, and if they match, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801 or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3 stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 and returns the card to the player. Further, when the player has started the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in CU3 Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 can be extracted from the card insertion / discharge port 309, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309 (card extraction possible state). The CU 3 is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  Then, when the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 notifies the P unit 2 of information indicating that the card return preparation state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2 Send. In response to this, the P stand 2 displays a message “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P platform 2 may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” from the speaker 270. Further, the P stand 2 transmits a command of a status information response including the serial number = n + 4, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting response = OFF to the CU3.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309 is in the ON state, the CU 3 transmits a command for a status information request including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P unit 2. However, when the player pulls out the card from the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is turned off, so that CU3 is waiting for card number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the state information including is transmitted to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278 and ends the notification of the card removal. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Furthermore, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 15 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Fluctuating information >>
Next, a process of collecting game information (information during change) during the change (during change display) until the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 of the P table 2 is started. explain. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing for transmitting game information to the CU 3 when the P table 2 is changing. In FIG. 16, a recording medium (member card or visitor card) is inserted into the CU 3, and a player plays a game on the P table 2. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball has not passed any of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 has not started, and the gaming state Is not changing. Therefore, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and changing = OFF to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is started and the gaming state is changing. It becomes. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, changing = ON, changing game ball information and gaming machine state information to the CU 3. Note that “Fluctuating = ON” means that Bit 3 in the gaming machine state 3 is in the ON state, and Bit 0 in the gaming machine state 3 (in the big hit + in the short time) is in the OFF state.

  The game ball information transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3 while the game state of the P unit 2 is changing includes at least the number of shot balls, and the game machine state information includes at least the game machine state 1, the launch stop switch state, and the change. Contains information inside. The number of fired balls is the “number of balls to be subtracted” in the counter information transmitted to the CU as a response, and is the number of balls detected by the output change from the on-off switch (upper) 41a to off. is there. Also, the number of shot balls is the number of balls detected by the change in output from the on-off switch 41a to the off state from the previous state information response response transmission to the current state information response response transmitted this time. is there. Further, the firing stop switch is provided in the vicinity of the hitting operation handle 25, and stops firing the ball when pressed when a process of firing the ball is performed by the launching device. The firing stop switch state includes a state in which the player does not hold the hitting operation handle 25 by a touch sensor provided on the hitting operation handle 25 other than a state in which the firing stop switch is pressed. While the gaming state of the P table 2 is changing, a process of requesting a status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2 and a process of transmitting a status information response command from the P table 2 to the CU 3 is continued several times. Information transmitted during the change is referred to as changing information (1).

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + m and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. When the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is stopped, the P platform 2 returns a response of a status information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + m and changing = OFF to the CU3. As a result, CU3 presumes that one change display is finished, and collects and stores the changing game ball information and gaming machine state information collected during the change as changing information (1). The changing information to be tabulated by the CU 3 includes at least the face recognition information ID, the creation time of the face recognition information, the count count value, the number of fired balls, the occurrence time, and the firing stop switch count value during the change.

  The face recognition information ID is the information of the face recognition information ID that has been received most recently when the changing bit (Bit 3 in gaming machine state 3) changes from the ON state “1” to the OFF state “0”. The creation time of the face recognition information is information on the creation time of the face recognition information ID that has been received most recently when the changing bit changes from the ON state “1” to the OFF state “0”.

  The CU 3 includes a face image capturing camera (not shown) that can capture a face image of a player who is playing a game on the corresponding P stand 2 between the replay button 319 and the ball lending button 321. . This face image capturing camera is for capturing a player who plays a game on the P platform 2 corresponding to CU3. Face data (eye) is obtained from the captured face image of the player by image recognition processing of the control unit of CU3. And a nose distance, the shape of the face outline, etc.) are extracted and processed by a predetermined algorithm to generate a face recognition information ID as numerical data. For example, the face image photographing camera images a player at the time of operating the ball lending button 321 or the like or at a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) interval, and generates and stores a face recognition information ID from the face image. Among the face recognition information IDs, the face recognition information ID stored immediately before the changing Bit changes from the ON state “1” to the OFF state “0” is used as the changing information. The time when the face recognition information ID is generated is set as the face recognition information creation time. Therefore, the creation time of the face recognition information ID stored immediately before the changing Bit changes from the ON state “1” to the OFF state “0” is used as the changing information.

  The CU 3 does not store the captured player's face image as it is, but stores it as an abstracted face recognition information ID. Therefore, the player's privacy can be protected as compared with the case where the face image is stored as it is. Further, by converting the face image into face recognition information ID, the same player can store the same face recognition information ID, and the data capacity to be stored can be reduced compared with the case of storing the face image as it is. it can.

  By collecting the face recognition information ID as the changing information, the game information being changed can be accumulated and totaled for each face recognition information ID (that is, for each player). By including the information of the creation time of the face recognition information in the changing information, if the creation time is close to the start time of the change display (corresponding to the generation time described later), the game by the player of the collected face recognition information ID It can be determined that a certain probability is high. On the contrary, if the creation time is far from the start time of the variable display (for example, 3 hours), there is a possibility that the game is performed by a player other than the player of the collected face recognition information ID.

  Other information to be collected as the changing information includes a measurement count value, the number of fired balls, an occurrence time, and a firing stop switch count value. The measurement count value is information in which the number of “status information responses” received while the changing bit is in the ON state “1” is recorded. For example, if the number of “status information responses” received from the start of the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 to the stop is 20, the measurement count value is 20.

  The number of shot balls is information on the number of balls shot while the changing Bit is in the ON state “1”. For example, if the number of balls fired from the start of the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 to the stop is 100 balls, the number of fired balls is 100 balls.

  The occurrence time is information on the time when the changing bit changes from the OFF state “0” to the ON state “1”. That is, the occurrence time is the start time of the variable display.

  The firing stop switch count value is received while the changing Bit is in the ON state “1”. The reception of the state information response that “Bit 6 in the gaming machine state 1 is the ON state“ 1 ”or Bit 1 is the OFF state“ 0 ”” is received. Information on the number of times. Here, Bit 6 of the gaming machine state 1 is information indicating a firing stop switch state, and when the OFF state is “0”, the switch release state is indicated, and when the ON state is “1”, the switch is pressed. . Bit 1 of the gaming machine state 1 is information representing the gaming state, and represents an idle state if the OFF state is “0”, and a gaming state if the ON state is “1”. In other words, the firing stop switch count value is information for knowing the time during which the strike stop is performed, and is information indicating the number of times the firing stop switch is pressed or the number of times the hand is released from the hitting operation handle 25. is there. Here, stop hit means that the start winning of the hit ball exceeding the upper limit value of the number of stored memories becomes invalid without being memorized. Therefore, the player avoids hitting the hit ball and operates the hitting operation handle 25. It is to stop. Since the consumption of the game balls is stopped while the stop is performed, the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

  CU3, as shown in FIG. 16, from the start to the end of one change display (until the change bit in OFF state “0” becomes ON state “1” and further becomes OFF state “0”). At the time when 20 pieces of changing information (information obtained by 20 changes display) is stored with the collected changing information as one piece of information, the changing information is transmitted to the hall management computer. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + p (m <p) and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is started and the gaming state is changing. It becomes. Therefore, the P stand 2 sends back a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 1 + p, changing = ON, changing game ball information and gaming machine state information to the CU 3.

  The game ball information transmitted to the CU 3 while the game state of the P unit 2 is changing includes at least the number of shot balls, and the game machine state information includes at least the game machine state 1, the launch stop switch state, and the information being changed. Contains. While the gaming state of the P table 2 is changing, a process of requesting a status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2 and a process of transmitting a status information response command from the P table 2 to the CU 3 is continued several times. Information transmitted during the change is referred to as changing information (20). Note that the numbers in parentheses of the changing information are numbers indicating how many pieces of changing information are collected. For example, in the case of changing information (20), it is the 20th changing information. This indicates that there is a change, and when the changing information is collected, the changing information is transmitted to the hall management computer.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + q (p <q) and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. When the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is stopped, the P platform 2 returns a response of a status information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + q and changing = OFF to the CU3. As a result, CU3 presumes that one change display is finished, and collects and stores the changing game ball information and gaming machine state information collected during the change as changing information (20).

  Next, the CU 3 collects and stores 20 pieces of changing information from the changing information (1) to the changing information (20) to the hall management computer. The hall management computer uses the measurement means, the number of fired balls, the time of occurrence, and the firing stop switch count, for each type of the P stand 2 and each face recognition information ID for the changing information received by using a computing means such as a CPU. Aggregate values. Note that the transmission destination of the changing information is not limited to the hall management computer, but may be the hall server 801 or an external aggregation center server.

  The hall management computer counts the measured count value, the number of fired balls, the occurrence time, and the firing stop switch count value for each type of the P platform 2 and for each face recognition information ID, so that the operation of the player who is changing Can be specified. The specified information can be displayed on a terminal connected to the hall management computer or output by voice. Based on the specified information, for example, it is possible to specify the period of the fluctuation display by counting the measurement count value, and the game ball is fired without pausing during the fluctuation display in relation to the number of shot balls It is possible to grasp whether or not it has continued. In addition, it is possible to identify which variation display the game is from the time of occurrence, and know how many times the player has pressed the launch stop switch during the variation display period in relation to the count value of the firing stop switch can do. Furthermore, by calculating the relationship between the firing stop switch count value and the number of payout balls, it is possible to grasp how efficiently the player played the game (player skill). These specified information can be tabulated for each model of P platform 2, for each island where P platform 2 is installed, and for each hall.

  As an opportunity to transmit the changing information to the hall management computer, an example of when the stored changing information is gathered has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the communication between the hall management computer and the CU 3 returns to the on-line state, the changing information stored in the CU 3 is 20 cases. It may be an opportunity to transmit to the hall management computer. When the changing information stored in the CU 3 exceeds 20 while the hall management computer is offline, the CU 3 overwrites the old changing information with the new changing information, and the changing information is 20 You may make it fit. In addition, the case where the store closing process is performed by the CU 3 may be a trigger for transmitting the changing information to the hall management computer. Furthermore, when the P stand 2 connected to the CU 3 is changed (including a case where at least one of the front frame 5 and the game board 26 is changed), it is also possible to send the changing information to the hall management computer. Good. In addition, when the installation state of CU3 changes (for example, when CU3 corresponding to P stand 2 is changed, the hall where CU3 is installed or the game island is changed, etc.), changing information is managed for the hall It is good also as an opportunity to transmit to a computer.

  Based on the instruction transmitted from the hall management computer, when the gaming state of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 can be shifted to the event state, the event state instruction is received from the hall management computer and the event state is released. The timing may be an opportunity to transmit the changing information to the hall management computer. Here, the event state is a state different from the normal game state, and is a game state such as a test hit state, an inspection state, or an adjustment state. Here, the test hit state is a game state in which the player can make a test hit without reducing his own game balls when the player selects a gaming machine. The inspection state is a gaming state that is set at the time of shipping inspection at the time of manufacture of a gaming machine by a gaming machine maker or operation confirmation at the time of installing a gaming machine at a gaming hall. The adjusted state is a gaming state set when displaying the number of balls such as safe / out, and confirming the base when adjusting the nail. Note that game states such as a test hit state, an inspection state, and an adjustment state may be collectively referred to as a test hit state. Note that even when the changing information stored in the CU 3 is less than 20 at the time of receiving the event end instruction from the hall management computer, the CU 3 transmits the changing information to the hall management computer. Also, when changing information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the hall management computer, the hall management computer is not configured to transmit a response command to the transmission request command from the CU 3, so the CU 3 It is possible that the changing information being transmitted is lost when the communication with is offline. Therefore, if the communication between the hall management computer and the CU 3 goes offline while the changing information is being transmitted, the hall management computer discards the changing information being received, and the CU 3 transmits the changing information again. It is good also as composition to do.

  Next, a trigger for deleting the changing information stored in the CU 3 will be described. Specifically, the CU 3 deletes the stored changing information when transmitting the changing information to the hall management computer. In addition, when the CU 3 receives a request signal for deleting the operation information from the hall management computer, the CU 3 may delete the stored changing information. Further, the CU 3 may delete the stored changing information when a prohibition setting for prohibiting storing the changing information is performed from a server such as a hall management computer. In addition, when the P stand 2 connected to the CU 3 is changed (including a case where at least one of the front frame 5 and the game board 26 is changed), the CU 3 may delete the stored changing information. Good. Furthermore, when the installation state of the CU 3 changes (for example, when the CU 3 corresponding to the P stand 2 is changed), the CU 3 may delete the stored changing information. Moreover, when the switch which deletes member information is set among the setting switches provided in CU3, CU3 may delete the information in change stored. Note that CU3 deletes the changing information stored when the gaming machine is changed or when the installation state changes, so it is collected before and after the gaming machine is changed or the installation state changes. Therefore, the game information can be collected separately before and after the change. The changing information collected by the hall management computer may be deleted after a predetermined counting process. Of course, the hall management computer may continue to hold the collected changing information without deleting it until it is stored in another storage medium.

<< Fluctuating information: Discard condition (1) >>
Next, the conditions for discarding the game information (in-change information) collected during the time from when the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 of the P table 2 starts until the symbol stops will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a condition for discarding the game information in change transmitted from the P stand 2 by the CU 3. In FIG. 17, a recording medium (member card or visitor card) is inserted into the CU 3, and a player plays a game on the P table 2. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball has not passed any of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 has not started, and the gaming state Is not changing. Therefore, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and changing = OFF to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is started and the gaming state is changing. It becomes. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, changing = ON, changing game ball information and gaming machine state information to the CU 3.

  The game ball information transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3 while the game state of the P unit 2 is changing includes at least the number of shot balls, and the game machine state information includes at least the game machine state 1, the launch stop switch state, and the change. Contains information inside. While the gaming state of the P table 2 is changing, a process of requesting a status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2 and a process of transmitting a status information response command from the P table 2 to the CU 3 is continued several times. Information transmitted during the change is assumed to be the change-in-time information.

  However, the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is disconnected and disconnected while the gaming state is changing. Until the communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 is disconnected, the changing information stored in the CU 3 is discarded by the process of transmitting the status information response command from the P base 2 to the CU 3. In other words, since the CU 3 cannot collect the changing information corresponding to one change display by disconnecting the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2, the changing game ball information and the gaming machine state collected during the previous change are not collected. Discard information (information that is changing).

  Next, the CU 3 resumes communication with the P unit 2 after the communication is disconnected, and transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1 + m and card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. Since the gaming state is changing, the P table 2 returns a response of the state information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + m and changing = ON to the CU3. Then, the communication with the P stand 2 is resumed after the CU 3 is disconnected, and the response of the state information response including the changing game ball information and the gaming machine state information is returned from the P stand 2 while the communication is resumed. Therefore, it becomes possible to collect information during the change. However, since the CU3 cannot collect the changing information corresponding to one change display by disconnecting the communication between the CU3 and the P stand 2, when the changing is ON after the communication is resumed, the reply is returned from the P stand 2. The game information to be played is not stored as changing information. That is, when the CU 3 is receiving the variable display information (during variable = ON) when starting communication with the P platform 2, the CU 3 does not store the game information received in the variable display as the variable information. Thereby, since CU3 does not collect game information from the middle of the change, the game information during the change of the P table 2 can be suitably collected.

  Processing in which a status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 while the gaming state of the P unit 2 is fluctuating after the communication is resumed, and a status information response command is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 Is continued a plurality of times, and the changing information is transmitted during the change, but CU3 does not store the changing information.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + p (m <p) and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. When the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is stopped, the P platform 2 returns a response of a state information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + p and changing = OFF to the CU 3. As a result, CU3 assumes that one change display has been completed, and the information that is being changed = ON that is being received when communication with P-unit 2 is started is switched to the information that is being changed = OFF. By receiving the information of changing = ON from the P base 2, it is possible to start collecting the changing information. In other words, the CU 3 that has received the information that is changing = ON when starting communication with the P machine 2 is prohibited from storing the game information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the changing information during the fluctuation. In this state, the prohibition state is canceled by receiving information indicating that the state is changing = OFF. In the present embodiment, the case where it is specified that the variable display is being performed is described based on “in-variation = ON information”. Then, it may be specified that the variable display is being performed until the variable end information indicating the end of the variable display is received.

<< Fluctuating information: Discard condition (2) >>
Next, another condition for discarding the game information (in-flight information) collected during the fluctuation until the symbol is stopped after the variation of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 of the P table 2 is started will be described. To do. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining another condition for discarding the game information during the change transmitted from the P platform 2 by the CU3. In FIG. 18, a recording medium (member card or visitor card) is inserted into the CU 3, and a player plays a game on the P table 2. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball has not passed any of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 has not started, and the gaming state Is not changing. Therefore, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and changing = OFF to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. If the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275, 276, 277 when the P stand 2 receives it, the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is started and the gaming state is changing. It becomes. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, changing = ON, changing game ball information and gaming machine state information to the CU 3.

  The game ball information transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3 while the game state of the P unit 2 is changing includes at least the number of shot balls, and the game machine state information includes at least the game machine state 1, the launch stop switch state, and the change. Contains information inside. While the gaming state of the P table 2 is changing, a process of requesting a status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2 and a process of transmitting a status information response command from the P table 2 to the CU 3 is continued several times. Information transmitted during the change is assumed to be the change-in-time information.

  The game state being changed ends when the change of the symbols displayed on the variable display device 278 stops. Therefore, the symbols displayed on the variable display device 278 do not stop during the period in which the changing gaming state is maintained (except for temporary stop). Therefore, the P table 2 does not transmit information other than the number of symbol stop times of game information to the CU 3 during the period of fluctuation = ON. However, if for some reason (for example, an illegal operation) CU3 receives information other than 0 (zero) game information symbol stop count during the period of fluctuation = ON, it is collected during the fluctuation Discarding the changing information. In other words, when the game state is fluctuating and the number of symbol stops of the game information is at least one, the CU 3 collects the fluctuating game ball information and the gaming machine collected during the fluctuation as not being a normal fluctuating display. Discard the status information (information that is changing).

  Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + m and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. Since the gaming state is changing, the P table 2 returns a response of the state information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + m and changing = ON to the CU3. Then, the communication with the P stand 2 is resumed after the CU 3 is disconnected, and the response of the state information response including the changing game ball information and the gaming machine state information is returned from the P stand 2 while the communication is resumed. . However, the response of the state information response includes information on the number of symbol stops = 1 as game information. For this reason, the CU 3 determines that the variation is not a normal variation display.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 + p (m <p) and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. When the change of the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 is stopped, the P platform 2 returns a response of a state information response including information of serial number = n + 1 + p and changing = OFF to the CU 3. As a result, the CU 3 discards the changing information collected during the change, which is determined not to be a normal change display, even if one change display is finished. Thereby, since only the game information from the normal variation display is stored, the CU 3 can suitably collect the game information during the variation of the P stand 2. Note that CU3 is not limited to the case of collectively deleting the changing information collected during the change when the change is OFF and the change ends. For example, when the CU3 receives a response of a status information response in which the number of symbol stops of the game information is at least one, the CU3 discards the changing information that has been collected so far and the subsequent changes It is not necessary to collect information during fluctuation.

  In addition, as another condition for discarding the game information to be collected (in-flight information), the game information collected at the time of trial hit is discarded when returning to the normal time from the trial hit.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and a status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P unit 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (the command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU3) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 19, CU 3 transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2 before the power interruption occurs during the game. In response to this, the P machine 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3 in order to notify the gaming machine information CU3. . The P machine 2 updates the previous last transmission serial number, which is the previous gaming machine information, to “n”.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2 during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, the P stand 2 is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2 is not transmitted, the CU 3 performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2 transmits the response of the status information response to the CU 3 until the power interruption occurs, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the gaming machine information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. The number of subtraction balls = 36, which is the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information that has already been transmitted, that is, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracting balls = 23, is the previous gaming machine information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P stand 2 is restored and the P stand 2 starts to operate. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 20 is started. When the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In the P machine 2 that has received it, first, the P machine 2 is the last last transmission serial number = n of the received recovery request and the last last backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). It is determined whether or not the transmission sequence number = n matches. If they match, it can be determined that the last status information response sent from the P-unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU3. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU 3 side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, unit price of balls) to the CU 3 as no gaming information storage (specifically, no previous gaming machine information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 before the CU3 has not reached the CU3, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous gaming machine information A recovery response (game number = 1, ball unit price) including game information is returned to CU3. The P stand 2 transmits the response of the recovery response including the ball unit price when transmitting the response to the CU 3, and transmits the ball unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process to the CU 3. As a result, the game can be played after the recovery process at the unit price of the game balls played before the recovery process. The response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform 2 described below to the CU 3 includes information on the unit price of the ball, but is not particularly specified when the information on the unit price of the ball is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described.

  In FIG. 19, CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing because there is no game information stored in the recovery response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P unit 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P base 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported gaming machine information (the number of gaming balls as the latest gaming machine information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a process of reading the count history stored in the P table 2 to the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a process of reading the count history stored in the P table 2 to the CU 3. First, the CU 3 transmits a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P platform 2. The P table 2 compares the store code transmitted and stored from the CU 3 with the card insertion notification command and the store code transmitted from the CU 3 with the count history request command. When the store code matches with the comparison result, the P table 2 sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the response of the counting history response so that the data can be transmitted to the CU 3. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response of the counting history response including the serial number = n, the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3.

  On the other hand, if the store code does not match as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2 sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU 3. Although not shown, the P platform 2 returns a response of a counting history response including a serial number = n and no counting history to the CU 3.

  Thus, the counting history sequence can recover the number of game balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P unit 2 to the CU 3, and can further recover a plurality of past (counting history 1 and counting history). By transmitting 2) to CU3, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted to the CU 3 are not limited to two times, and may be three or more count histories.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not yet reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication line disconnection and the response of the status information response has not yet reached from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response does not reach (the command does not reach the CU 3 from the P base 2) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 21, after a power interruption occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in P 2 and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtracting balls = 36, which becomes the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information that has already been transmitted, that is, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracting balls = 23, is the previous gaming machine information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801 periodically receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power-off of the CU 3 is restored, and the CU 3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 20 is started. When the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n−1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2, the previous last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n−1, and the last final transmission sequence number backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) = n Are compared. As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached CU3. Therefore, the P machine 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game machine information exists) to the CU 3 as having unreported game information to the CU 3. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous gaming machine information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU3.

  The CU 3 executes the recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 executes a first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P unit 2 as a recovery response is an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response. Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P unit 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the unreported gaming machine information (the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls) included in the state information response that did not reach the CU 3 before the occurrence of the power interruption. = 36) is notified to the CU 3 by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreasonable due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P unit 2 to CU3). The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3, or by manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by inserting / removing the CU3 from / from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 22, after a power interruption occurs during the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in P 2 and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtracting balls = 36, which becomes the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information that has already been transmitted, that is, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracting balls = 23, is the previous gaming machine information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU 3 is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU 3 is replaced and a new CU 3 starts operating.

  In addition, when CU3 which was operating before CU replacement has stored the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801 (the number of holding balls).

  When the exchanged CU3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. Is done. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 20 is started. When the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including serial number = 1, previous last transmission serial number = n, and previous final transmission count serial number = p to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since the exchange of CU3 has occurred, the P table 2 sets the previous last transmission sequence number = 0, the presence / absence of game information storage = nothing, and notifies the CU3 only of the number of game balls. Specifically, since the P table 2 performs the recovery process for the CU 3 after replacement, the previous last transmission sequence number = 0, the last last transmission addition sequence number = m, the presence / absence of game information storage = no storage (0), and the number of game balls = Recovery response (serial number = 1) including 450 is returned to CU3. If the counting is being requested, the P stand 2 does not subtract the game ball and returns the counting sequence number to 0 (zero).

  The CU 3 executes the recovery process for only the number of game balls because the previous last transmission sequence number notified from the P unit 2 is zero. Note that, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the recovery information stored in the CU 3 before the exchange is lost when the power interruption occurs during the addition request. Therefore, it is not possible to carry out recovery using the command of recovery request 2. Therefore, operations such as a store clerk performing a correction operation are required.

  The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 performs a recovery process (the number of game balls = 450) using the information on the number of game balls received from the P stand 2. The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3.

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the gaming machine information (the number of game balls = 450, the total number of winning balls = 0, the number of shot balls = 0) by a status information response.

<< Incorrect ball unit price detection when game balls are added >>
Next, the illegal ball unit price detection process at the time of an addition request will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of illegal ball detection processing at the time of an addition request. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the ball unit price is illegally changed on the CU3 side when a game ball addition request is made during a game. In this sequence, the processing when the unit price is illegally changed on the CU 3 side will be described. However, even if the unit unit price is illegally changed on the P stand 2 side, the same processing as the processing described below is performed. Done. In addition, the illegal ball unit price detection process described below is applied to an enclosed circulation pachinko gaming machine and an adjacent gaming device, but also to a pachinko gaming machine and an adjacent gaming device that are not enclosed circulation type. The same can be applied.

  In FIG. 23, each of the P stand 2 and the CU 3 initially stores 50 game balls and stores a ball unit price of 4 yen. Each of the P units 2 and the CU 3 stores information on the set unit price (for example, information on the unit price notified to the CU 3 from the host device). First, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including the serial number = n, the card insertion state = ON, the game ball addition request = OFF, the number of additional balls = 0, the additional serial number = m, and the ball unit price = 4 yen to the P unit 2. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3. Here, the game ball addition result included in the response of the status information response of the P unit 2 is “OK”, which indicates that the processing result of the previous game ball addition request was OK.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in which the unit price of game balls is illegally changed in CU3. Specifically, the unit price stored in CU3 is illegally changed from 4 yen to 1 yen. Then, the player presses the ball lending button. Therefore, CU3 confirms prepaid consumption for 125 yen, including serial number = n + 1, card insertion state = ON, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, additional serial number = m + 1 and unit price = 1 yen. A status information request command is transmitted to the P stand 2 to notify the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) obtained by converting the prepaid balance into game balls. At that time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the updated last transmission addition serial number updated.

  When the P table 2 receives the CU3 status information request command, the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the state information request command and the ball unit price information (ball unit price) stored in the P unit 2 = 4 yen), and an abnormality in the ball unit price is detected. Specifically, the P unit 2 receives the ball unit price information (here, the state) stored in the CU 3 when the information requesting the addition of the game ball based on the addition instruction (game ball addition request = ON) is received from the CU 3. Ball unit price information included in the information request command: CU side ball unit price) and ball unit price information stored in the P unit 2 (ball unit information stored in the RAM of the P unit 2: P unit side unit price) It is determined whether or not they match, and it is determined that they do not match. In this determination, in addition to the case where the determination is made by comparing CU side unit price information and CU side unit price information at CU3, the result of comparison between P unit side unit price information and CU side unit price information at P unit 2 is the same. It is also included when it is determined whether or not they are inconsistent. And the P stand 2 includes a serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG, an addition serial number = m, and Bit 3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3 The response of the information response is returned to CU3. Specifically, the P platform 2 notifies Bit3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3 indicating that the unit price of the ball is illegal, and a game ball addition result = NG indicating that no game balls are added. Further, the P stand 2 does not back up data such as an addition serial number and the number of game balls.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG and the bit 3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3 notifies the occurrence of the error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312. Specifically, CU3, in accordance with a predetermined priority order, reports a unit price error indicating that the unit price is incorrect, and an addition indicating that the addition of the game balls is NG (the game ball addition process in P unit 2 is abnormal). Error notification is executed. The addition error is an error based on the result that the game ball addition result included in the status information request from the P table 2 is NG. As a specific example, for example, the processing of the P table 2 is busy, and the CU 3 to the P table 2 In some cases, the number of balls requested to be added cannot be added to the number of game balls. It should be noted that the priority is set in descending order of the importance. As a result, for example, when there is a limit to the number of abnormality notification lamps that can be installed and the number of errors that can be notified at the same time, if notification is made in the order in which the errors occurred, an error of low importance is reported and It is possible to prevent a situation where a high error is not notified. Since an error with a higher priority is given priority over an error with a lower importance, it is possible to notify an important abnormality to an amusement shop clerk at an earlier stage. Here, the error notification is not limited to the one performed by the CU3. Even if the error notification is executed by the P unit 2, the CU3 instructs the P unit 2 or the host device to execute the error notification. May be. Note that “priority” is to give some superiority or inferiority to a plurality of error notifications, for example, to give superiority or inferiority such as display order, display size, or the like.

  The error notification priority is higher for the unit price error than the addition error (that is, the unit price error is more important than the addition error). Therefore, for example, the CU 3 executes the addition error notification after executing the unit price error notification. Note that the unit price error is an error that occurs when Bit3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3, but other fraud detection states 3 (for example, iron ball detection of Bit1) and fraud detection states 1 and 2 are also balls. Similar to the unit price error, the error notification priority is higher than the addition error. In the fraud detection states 1 to 3, in the order of the fraud detection state 1> the fraud detection state 2> the fraud detection state 3, and within the same fraud detection state, the bit numbers are in ascending order (for example, the fraud detection state 1 Bit0 (incorrect detection information of radio wave sensor detection)> Bit1 (correct detection information of non-magnetic sensor detection)). Of course, in the fraud detection states 1 to 3, the priority of error notification may be the same, and notification may be performed in the order in which errors occurred. Further, the CU 3 may be configured to execute only the unit price error notification when there are restrictions on devices (such as an abnormality notification lamp and a display 312) that can be used for error notification. Further, the CU 3 performs both the unit price error notification and the addition error notification, but the notification mode of the unit price error is more conspicuous than the notification mode of the addition error (for example, the color of the notification unit lamp of the unit price error is changed). These notifications may be executed, such as changing or highlighting a message indicating a unit price error. Further, the CU 3 may switch and execute the error notification in the order of higher priority, or may switch to and execute the error notification of the next order when the error notification with the higher priority is resolved. In addition to the addition error notification that is an error notification related to the state of the P unit 2, a notification of a gaming machine error state related to the number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls is performed. The priority is set even lower than. Therefore, when a ball unit price error, an addition error, and a gaming machine error state are occurring, the CU 3 performs error notification in the order of, for example, a unit price error, an addition error, and a gaming machine error state.

  However, when the CU 3 outputs an error to a higher-level device (for example, the hall server 801), information (for example, error occurrence time, CU 3 identification information, error Code, bit information predetermined for each error content, etc.) is transmitted to the host device. For error output to the host device, every time an error occurs, information that can identify the content of the error that occurred can be sent in a batch. May be. The error output to the host device may simply transmit bit information corresponding to the generated error. Thereby, even if a predetermined error is not notified on the CU 3 side, all errors can be displayed on the host device side, and the generated errors can be grasped in a list.

  Then, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the card insertion state = ON, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, the additional serial number = m + 1, and the unit price = 1 yen to the P unit 2. resend. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, since the status information response to the previous status information request has been transmitted normally, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2. However, since the game ball addition result included in the status information response is NG, the CU 3 retransmits the status information request command without updating the addition serial number.

  However, CU3 remains in a state in which an abnormality in which the unit price of the ball has been changed illegally has occurred. Therefore, upon receiving the re-sent status information request command from CU3, P-unit 2 receives serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = NG, addition serial number = m and a response of a state information response including Bit3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3 are returned to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 receives a command for a state information request including a game ball addition request = ON until receiving a response of a state information response including a game ball addition result = OK from the P stand 2 and Bit 3 = OFF in the fraud detection state 3. Keep resending. Specifically, until the ball unit price information included in the status information request command matches the ball unit price information stored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 determines the game ball based on the addition instruction until it is determined in the P unit 2. Transmission of information requesting addition (game ball addition request = ON) is continued. The CU 3 is not limited to the case of continuing to retransmit the command for the status information request including the game ball addition request = ON, and the processing based on the ball rental button pressing (granting instruction) on the P stand 2 (for example, a ball) (E.g. holding information on pressing of the lending button). In addition, if the P stand 2 is a pachinko gaming machine that is not an enclosed circulation type, a state in which a game ball can be lent from the unit to the pachinko gaming machine (for example, a state in which a game ball is held so that it can be lent from the nozzle of the unit). continue. During this time, in the CU3, the normal ball unit price (= 4 yen) is notified from the host device, and the CU3 is updated from the incorrect ball unit price (= 1 yen) to the normal ball unit price (= 4 yen). Until this time, the process related to the game is temporarily interrupted and enters a waiting state, and the process related to the game of the CU 3 and the game on the P table 2 are not stopped (error down). For example, until the CU3 is updated to the normal ball unit price (= 4 yen), the processing such as the ball lending, the ball payout, and the storage ball payout is temporarily interrupted and is in a waiting state. The game ball can be fired and the game state such as during a big hit is continued. Of course, even if the processing related to the game of CU3 is stopped (error down), and the game only for P table 2 is temporarily interrupted, both the processing related to the game of CU3 and the game on P table 2 are stopped (error down). You may let them.

<< Incorrect unit price detection when counting button is pressed >>
Next, the illegal ball unit price detection process when counting is requested (when the counting button is pressed) will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of fraudulent unit price detection processing at the time of a count request. In particular, processing when the ball unit price is illegally changed on the CU3 side at the time of a counting request from a game ball (game value stored in the P stand 2) to a holding ball (game value stored in the CU3) during a game The sequence diagram for demonstrating is shown. In this sequence, the processing when the unit price is illegally changed on the CU 3 side will be described. However, even if the unit unit price is illegally changed on the P stand 2 side, the same processing as the processing described below is performed. Done.

  In FIG. 24, initially, CU3 is storing the number of balls held as 0 balls and the unit price of balls is 4 yen, and P stand 2 stores the number of balls as 0 balls and the unit price of balls is 4 yen. It is in a state of being. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n, the card insertion state = ON, the count response = OFF, the count reception state = OK, the count serial number = m, and the unit price = 4 yen to the P unit 2. . In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the count request = OFF, the count ball number = 0, and the count serial number = m to the CU 3. Here, the count reception state included in the response of the status information response of the P platform 2 is “OK”, which indicates that the processing result of the previous count request is OK.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in which the unit price of game balls is illegally changed in CU3. Specifically, the unit price stored in CU3 is illegally changed from 4 yen to 1 yen. In addition, the player presses the count button to convert the game balls stored in the P stand 2 into the holding balls stored in the CU 3. Then, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the card insertion state = ON, the count response = OFF, the count reception state = OK, the count serial number = m, and the unit price = 1 yen to the P unit 2. .

  When the P table 2 receives a counting instruction based on pressing of the counting button, the ball unit information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the status information request command received from the CU 3 is stored in the P table 2. It is determined whether or not the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 4 yen) matches, and it is determined that they do not match. In this determination, in addition to the case where the determination is made by comparing CU side unit price information and CU side unit price information at CU3, the result of comparison between P unit side unit price information and CU side unit price information at P unit 2 is the same. It is also included when it is determined whether or not they are inconsistent. Further, the P base 2 does not execute the counting process. Therefore, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before subtraction of game balls), a count request = OFF, a count ball number = 0 balls, a count sequence number = m, and Bit 3 of fraud detection state 3 A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to CU3. That is, since the P unit 2 detects an abnormality in the ball unit price, it accepts a counting instruction for converting a game ball into a holding ball, but does not make a counting request to the CU 3 (counting request = OFF). Notification). Further, the P stand 2 does not back up data such as an addition serial number and the number of game balls.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the state information response including Bit 3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3 notifies the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312. Specifically, the CU 3 performs a ball unit price error notification indicating that the ball unit price is incorrect and an error notification regarding that it is impossible to accept a counting instruction for converting a game ball into a possession ball. The error notification regarding the impossibility of accepting the counting instruction is a notification based on an error generated in the control unit of the CU3. As a specific example, for example, when the communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b is interrupted, When the count instruction cannot be accepted, an error notification of the communication disconnection is performed. In addition, CU3 may perform notification of a ball unit price error indicating that the unit price is incorrect, error notification generated in the control unit of CU3, and error notification regarding the state of the P stand 2 in accordance with a predetermined priority. Here, since the unit price error is higher in error notification priority than the error generated in the control unit of CU3, CU3, for example, the error generated in the control unit of CU3 after executing the unit price error notification Announcement is executed. Note that the unit price error is an error that occurs when Bit3 = ON in the fraud detection state 3, but other fraud detection states 3 (for example, iron ball detection of Bit1) and fraud detection states 1 and 2 are also balls. Similar to the unit price error, the error notification priority is higher than the error generated in the control unit of the CU3. Here, the error notification is not limited to the one performed by the CU3. Even if the error notification is executed by the P unit 2, the CU3 instructs the P unit 2 or the host device to execute the error notification. May be.

  However, when the CU 3 outputs an error to a higher-level device (for example, the hall server 801), information (for example, error occurrence time, CU 3 identification information, error Code, bit information predetermined for each error content, etc.) is transmitted to the host device. For error output to the host device, every time an error occurs, information that can identify the content of the error that occurred can be sent in a batch. May be. The error output to the host device may simply transmit bit information corresponding to the generated error. Thereby, even if a predetermined error is not notified on the CU 3 side, all errors can be displayed on the host device side, and the generated errors can be grasped in a list.

  Then, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the card insertion state = ON, the count response = OFF, the count reception state = OK, the count serial number = m, and the unit price = 1 yen to the P unit 2. . However, CU3 remains in a state in which an abnormality in which the unit price of the ball has been changed illegally has occurred. Therefore, the P table 2 accepts a counting instruction based on the player pressing the counting button, but the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the status information request command received from the CU 3 and the P unit Since the ball unit price information 2 (ball unit price = 4 yen) does not match, the counting process is not executed. Therefore, P stand 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball subtraction), count request = OFF, count ball number = 0, count sequence number = m, and Bit 3 of fraud detection state 3 = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, the P unit 2 counts the number of balls converted according to the counting instruction until it determines that the unit price information included in the command of the status information request received from the CU 3 matches the unit price information stored in the P unit 2. The transmission of the response of the state information response including the count ball = 0 ball is continued without transmitting the response of the state information response including the information (for example, 125 balls). Note that the P stand 2 is not limited to the case where the response of the status information response including information on the number of counting balls (for example, 125 balls) is continued, and the processing based on pressing of the counting button (conversion instruction) to the CU 3 ( For example, the information on pressing of the counting button may be maintained. Moreover, if the P stand 2 is a pachinko gaming machine that is not an enclosed circulation type, the state in which the counting of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine by each stand counter is suspended is continued. A normal ball unit price (= 4 yen) is notified from the CU 3, and the P unit 2 is updated from an incorrect ball unit price (= 1 yen) to a normal ball unit price (= 4 yen). Is temporarily interrupted and enters a wait state, and the processing relating to the game of CU3 and the game on the P table 2 are not stopped (error down). For example, in the P platform 2, the game balls are stopped from being fired until the ball unit price is updated to the normal ball unit price (= 4 yen), and the game is temporarily interrupted while the game state such as a big hit is maintained. In CU3, processing related to games such as storing balls in the hall server as stored balls only by temporarily interrupting processing such as ball lending, ball payout, and ball payout for P stand 2 in CU3 Will continue. Even if the processing related to the game of CU3 is stopped (error down), and the game only for P table 2 is temporarily interrupted, both the processing related to the game of CU3 and the game on P table 2 are stopped (error down). You may let them. Further, as described above, in order for the P unit 2 to change the setting of the ball unit price, it is necessary to set the number of game balls to 0 (zero) ball, so the game balls stored in the RAM of the P unit 2 It is necessary to clear the number.

<< Detection of illegal unit price at unit replacement >>
Next, the illegal ball unit price detection process at the time of CU replacement will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of illegal ball detection processing during CU replacement. In particular, the sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the unit price stored in the CU 3 where the failure occurred before the game is performed and the unit price stored in the new CU 3 replaced is shown. is there.

  In FIG. 25, each of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 initially stores the number of game balls as 500 balls and stores the ball unit price as 4 yen. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n and the unit price = 4 yen to the P platform 2. In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the gaming machine information, the P stand 2 includes serial number = n, number of game balls = 502, total number of winning balls = 3, number of shot balls = 1, and additional serial number = m. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. The P unit 2 backs up by updating the last transmission sequence number to “n” last time.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, and based on the information of the number of game balls = 502, the total number of ball balls = 3, and the number of shot balls = 1, Update the number of balls and fired balls. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number to “n” and backs up.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 and a unit price = 4 yen to the P platform 2. Thereafter, a failure occurs in CU3, and the failed CU3 is replaced with a new CU3 in which the unit price = 1 yen is stored. Since a failure has occurred in CU3, the response of the status information response to the status information request command of serial number = n + 1 has not reached CU3. The P stand 2 sets the information of the number of game balls = 504, the total number of winning balls = 6, the number of shot balls = 4 included in the response of the status information response that has not reached CU3, and sets the last transmission serial number to “n + 1”. Update and back up.

  When the new CU 3 starts to operate, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P base 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is sent from the P base 2 to the CU 3. Sent. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 20 is started. When the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n, and the last final transmission count serial number = p to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since the exchange of CU3 has occurred, the P table 2 sets the previous last transmission serial number = 0, the presence / absence of storage of game information = no storage, and notifies only the number of game balls to the CU3. Specifically, since the P table 2 performs the recovery process for the CU 3 after replacement, the last transmission serial number = 0, the ball unit price = 4 yen, the number of game balls = 504, and the presence / absence of game information storage = no storage (0 ) Including a recovery response (serial number = 1) is returned to CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the recovery response receives the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 4 yen) included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P unit 2 as the recovery response and the ball unit price information (ball unit) stored in the CU 3. (Unit price = 1 yen) is determined to match, and it is determined not to match. In this determination, in addition to the case where the determination is made by comparing CU side unit price information and CU side unit price information at CU3, the result of comparison between P unit side unit price information and CU side unit price information at P unit 2 is the same. It is also included when it is determined whether or not they are inconsistent. The CU 3 that has detected the fraud of the unit price of the ball notifies the occurrence of the unit price error indicating the fraud of the unit price of the ball by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 according to a predetermined priority order. In CU3, for example, the ball unit price error has a higher error notification priority than the notification of the gaming machine error state to be notified because of a difference in the number of gaming balls in the recovery process of gaming balls (that is, in the gaming machine error state) Jade unit price error is more important than notification). Therefore, CU3 performs notification of a gaming machine error state, for example, after performing ball unit price error notification. Here, the error notification is not limited to the one performed by the CU3. Even if the error notification is executed by the P unit 2, the CU3 instructs the P unit 2 or the host device to execute the error notification. May be.

  However, when the CU 3 outputs an error to a higher-level device (for example, the hall server 801), information (for example, error occurrence time, CU 3 identification information, error Code, bit information predetermined for each error content, etc.) is transmitted to the host device. For error output to the host device, every time an error occurs, information that can identify the content of the error that occurred can be sent in a batch. May be. The error output to the host device may simply transmit bit information corresponding to the generated error. Thereby, even if a predetermined error is not notified on the CU 3 side, all errors can be displayed on the host device side, and the generated errors can be grasped in a list.

  And when CU3 detects the fraud of the ball unit price, the process related to the game is stopped (error down) by turning off the power supply. The normal unit price (= 4 yen) is notified from the host device, and the CU 3 is updated until the CU 3 is updated from the incorrect unit price (= 1 yen) to the normal unit price (= 4 yen). Stop processing related to the game. It should be noted that both the processing related to the game of CU3 and the game on the P table 2 may be stopped (error down).

<< Detection of fraudulent unit price when changing gaming machines >>
Next, the illegal ball unit price detection process at the time of P vehicle replacement will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of fraudulent ball detection processing at the time of exchanging P cars. In particular, a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the unit price stored in the P stand 2 in which a failure has occurred during the game and the unit price stored in the new replaced P base 2 is different is shown. It is.

  In FIG. 26, each of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 initially stores the number of game balls as 0 balls and stores the ball unit price as 4 yen. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n and the unit price = 4 yen to the P platform 2. In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the gaming machine information, the P stand 2 includes the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 0, the total number of winning balls = 0, the number of shot balls = 0, and the additional serial number = m. A response of the status information response is returned to CU3. The P unit 2 updates the previous last transmission sequence number to “n”.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, and based on the information of the number of game balls = 0, the total number of ball balls = 0, the number of shot balls = 0, Update the number of balls and fired balls. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number to “n” and backs up.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 and a unit price = 4 yen to the P platform 2. Here, a failure occurs in the P stand 2, and the failed P stand 2 is replaced with a new P stand 2 in which the unit price = 1 yen and the number of game balls = 50 balls are stored.

  When the new P base 2 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P base 2, and the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are included from the P base 2 to the CU 3. Information is sent. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 20 is started. When the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2 is transmitted to the CU 3. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n, and the last final transmission count serial number = p to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since the exchange of the P unit 2 has occurred, the P unit 2 after the exchange sets the previous last transmission serial number = 0, game information storage presence / absence = no storage, and only the number of game balls (= 50 balls) is set to CU3. Notify Specifically, since the P platform 2 after the replacement performs recovery processing for the CU 3, the last transmission serial number = 0, the ball unit price = 1 yen, the number of game balls = 50, and the presence / absence of game information storage = no storage (0 ) Including a recovery response (serial number = 1) is returned to CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the recovery response receives the ball unit price information (ball unit price = 1 yen) included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P unit 2 as the recovery response, and the unit price information (ball unit) stored in the CU 3. (Unit price = 4 yen) is determined to match, and it is determined not to match. In this determination, in addition to the case where the determination is made by comparing CU side unit price information and CU side unit price information at CU3, the result of comparison between P unit side unit price information and CU side unit price information at P unit 2 is the same. It is also included when it is determined whether or not they are inconsistent. The CU 3 that has detected the fraud of the unit price of the ball notifies the occurrence of the unit price error indicating the fraud of the unit price of the ball by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 according to a predetermined priority order. For example, the CU3 has a higher error notification priority than the notification of the gaming machine error state that is notified because of a difference in the gaming information (that is, the error of the unit price error is higher than the notification of the gaming machine error state). Is more important). Therefore, CU3 performs notification of a gaming machine error state, for example, after performing ball unit price error notification. Here, the error notification is not limited to the one performed by the CU3. Even if the error notification is executed by the P unit 2, the CU3 instructs the P unit 2 or the host device to execute the error notification. May be.

  However, when the CU 3 outputs an error to a higher-level device (for example, the hall server 801), information (for example, error occurrence time, CU 3 identification information, error Code, bit information predetermined for each error content, etc.) is transmitted to the host device. For error output to the host device, every time an error occurs, information that can identify the content of the error that occurred can be sent in a batch. May be. The error output to the host device may simply transmit bit information corresponding to the generated error. Thereby, even if a predetermined error is not notified on the CU 3 side, all errors can be displayed on the host device side, and the generated errors can be grasped in a list.

  Then, when the P unit 2 detects the fraud of the unit price, it stops the game (error down) by turning off the power. A normal ball unit price (= 4 yen) is notified from CU3, and P table 2 is updated from an incorrect ball unit price (= 1 yen) to a normal ball unit price (= 4 yen). The stand 2 stops the game. It should be noted that both the processing related to the game of CU3 and the game on the P table 2 may be stopped (error down). As described above, in order for the P unit 2 to change the setting of the ball unit price, it is necessary to set the number of game balls to 0 (zero) ball. The number of game balls stored in the RAM of the table 2 is cleared.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal during ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 27, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At this time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3 status information request command, the P stand 2 sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. The P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to table 2. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of CU3, the P platform 2 receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition sequence number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted to P stand 2 for the second time. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted with the addition sequence number remaining m + 1.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from CU3, the P stand 2 receives a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 retransmits to the P unit 2 a status information request command including a serial number = n + X, a game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and an addition serial number = m + 1. . In the P 2, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After performing the addition processing to the game balls, the P stand 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3. In response to this, the CU 3 turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 28 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 28 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P stand 2.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the message (1) returns a message (2) that includes the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message, as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2 that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a stored ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P platform 2 receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed by, for example, the payout control unit 171 of the P stand 2. The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P platform 2 side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 includes an area for backup storage of the addition sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the message (6) compares and determines the addition sequence number stored in the backup and the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 28 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2 waits for a message from the CU 3, no message is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ′, and retransmits the same request message (5) ″ because there is no response from the P-unit 2.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 29 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 29 is transmitted / received between the CU 3 and the P base 2.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) is generated, the request message (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 (normal sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2 does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2 receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is made, for example, by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the counting process (the adding process of the holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P table 2 includes an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171 of the P table 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'of FIG. 29 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2. The P-station 2 that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2 retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3 regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3 and the P unit 2). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to second check processing>
Next, the first check process and the second check process executed by the CU control unit 323 will be described based on FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b).

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 300, it is determined whether or not there is storage of gaming machine information. This is to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P machine 2, and in the case of FIGS. 21 and 22, the gaming machine information (specifically, Is included in the previous game machine information), YES is determined in S300. If it is determined that the gaming machine information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of gaming machine information, the control proceeds to S301, and the number of balls to be added included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, previous gaming machine information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the state information request and the state information response between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than (Equation 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the number of added balls larger than the threshold value N1 means that the gaming machine information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P unit 2 while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to CU3. In that case, the control advances to S304, and control for notifying the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 is performed, and control for transmitting an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801 is performed. (In this case, error notification may be performed by the hall server 801). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S305, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in S301 and S303, the information stored on the CU3 side is that the cause is that the CU3 or the P stand 2 is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P base 2 during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S301, the control proceeds to S302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323, and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the gaming machine information received from the P unit 2 is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added number of balls and the number of subtracted balls. It is calculated. Next, in S303, the calculated R1−the absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the gaming machine information (specifically, the current gaming machine information) included in the status information response from the P stand 2 returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. A determination is made in S310 as to whether or not it is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is from the time when the P unit transmits a status information response to the CU3 until the power supply is interrupted to the P unit or until the game stops when the P unit detects a communication line disconnection. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. If the number of added balls received is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to S314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 and an error occurs in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S315, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S310, the control advances to S311 to add the received addition ball number to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 and subtract the received subtraction ball number. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. The “stored number of game balls” referred to here is the number of game balls received from the P-unit 2 when NO is determined in S303 as described above. Then, in S312, it is determined whether or not the difference between the R2 and the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to S314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in S <b> 312, the control proceeds to S <b> 313, and the CU control unit 323 stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of S313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P base 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 receives the initial value by S313. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2 based on the current number of game balls. It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of incoming game balls exceeds a predetermined error ball number (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, an abnormality is determined and the above-described S304, S305, S314, and S315 The same control is performed.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted as the gaming machine information from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 first, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time, so that both the gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3 side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323 can determine the suitability of both pieces of gaming machine information. As a result, for example, the game ball number data in the previous gaming machine information sent from the P unit 2 should not be significantly different from the game ball number data stored in the CU control unit 323 at the present time, For example, the game ball number data in the current game machine data sent thereafter is not so different from the game ball number data in the previous game machine information received by the CU 3. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous gaming machine data and the current gaming data is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 at a time, compared to the case where the previous gaming machine data and the current gaming machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the gaming machine data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323 can distinguish between the two data, and enables detailed abnormality determination for each gaming machine data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the second check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added if it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3 stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous gaming machine information received from the P unit 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game machine information received from the P 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P latest game balls”) is determined by comparison between the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the second check process are preferably executed when the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the second check process. Therefore, when the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is replaced after the communication is cut off, the first check process and the second check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2 as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323 is 2 or more, the CU 3 or the P unit 2 The CU control unit 323 determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323 does not perform the first check process and the second check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is replaced, it may be controlled so that the previous gaming machine data and the current gaming machine data are not checked at the CU 3 side at the time of recovery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the troublesomeness that the check abnormality determination due to the replacement of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 occurs.

<When recovery information is registered (updated) and deleted (cleared)>
In the abnormal system sequence shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the sequence for executing the recovery process using the recovery information stored in the P unit 2 or the CU 3 to restore the system has been described. The recovery information used in this recovery process includes, for example, “last last transmission sequence number”, “previous last transmission addition sequence number”, “previous last transmission count sequence number”, “count required number of balls”, “card ID”, “card insertion” There are “time”, “store code”, “SC board ID”, “game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number”, “ball unit price”, and the like.

  The recovery information is newly registered or updated, and the timing (trigger) at which the information is stored in the P unit 2 or the CU 3 differs depending on the information. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the trigger for recovery information registration (update) and deletion (clear). With reference to FIG. 31, the timing (trigger) of registration or update of each recovery information will be described. “Previous last transmission serial number” is newly registered or updated when the P table 2 transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3 (when the status information response is transmitted). “Previous last transmission addition serial number” is CU state Bit3 = “1” (at the time of game ball addition request) included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3, and P unit 2 sends a response of the state information response to CU3. Is newly registered or updated when it is transmitted (when the status information response is transmitted).

  “Last transmission count sequence number last time” and “Number of balls required for counting” are Bit 4 = “1” (when counting is requested) of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response transmitted by the P unit 2 to the CU 3. It is newly registered or updated when a response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU 3 (when the status information response is transmitted). The “card ID” and “card insertion time” are newly registered or updated when the P base 2 transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3 (at the time of card insertion response transmission).

  “Store code” and “SC board ID” indicate when the P base 2 transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3 (when the card insertion response is transmitted) or when the P base 2 receives a counting history request command from the CU 3 Newly registered or updated (when counting history is requested). “Game ball information”, “game information”, “number of game balls” and “ball unit price” are newly registered or registered when the P stand 2 transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3 (when the status information response is transmitted). Updated.

  Next, the timing (trigger) of erasing (clearing) each recovery information will be described with reference to FIG. “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number”, “Previous Last Transmission Count Sequence Number”, and “Number of Count Request Balls” are the values when the P base 2 transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 (at the time of communication start response transmission) or to the P base 2 Information is erased when an instruction to clear the provided RAM is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “last previous transmission addition serial number” is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2 is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

  “Card ID” and “card insertion time” are when the P base 2 transmits a response to the card return response to the CU 3 (when the card return response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2 is given. Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. The “card ID” and “card insertion time” indicate when the P stand 2 detects the mismatch of the store code and transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 (when the communication start response is transmitted when the store mismatch is detected). The information is deleted.

  The “store code” and “SC board ID” are erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided on the P table 2 is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “game ball information” and “game information” are used when the P base 2 transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 (when the communication start response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2 is given. Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. Information on the “number of game balls” and the “ball unit price” is deleted when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P stand 2 is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325a. First, encryption keys used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC 325a mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323 during the initial communication with the hall server, and stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325b generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  In both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323 receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325b receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325a. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325b from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325b. The communication control IC 325a is also similar to the SC 325b. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325a. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323 and the communication control IC 325a themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and this authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until a set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325b and Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325a. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). SC 325b and communication control IC 325a store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325b via the CU control unit 323 and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325a during initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325a. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for gaming machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325b using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325b acquires an effective key via the CU control unit 323 at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325b transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325a, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323 receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and stores it in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. The SC 325b generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325b performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323 using the acquired substrate initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323 in a timely manner using the substrate initial key. In addition, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323 when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323 according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using the board manufacturer code stored as initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 38). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b, and the SC 325b acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323 does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323 itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323 itself acquires predetermined first data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, SC 325b performs cryptographic communication with communication control IC 325a using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry number matches, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325a using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325a from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information in the same manner as the SC 325b.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU 3 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  33 and 34 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board connection request command requests the SC 325b to connect to a gaming machine (P 2). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response to the board connection response notifies the CU control unit 323 of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board shipment key request command requests the board 325b for a board shipment key. A response of the board shipment key response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325, and is stored in the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. The board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board manufacturer code. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of board manufacturer code authentication information.

  A command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board serial ID authentication information.

  A command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board initial key. A response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board initial key. A response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  A command for board shipment key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325b to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A command of board shipment key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325b to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325b of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of this version information response notifies the CU control unit 323 that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325b of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323 of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b.

  A security board information inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information inquiry instruction notification command instructs the security board information inquiry request 1 to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information inquiry request 1 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the security board information inquiry request 1 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the security board information inquiry information 1.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information notification command notifies the security information 1 to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information notification response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information notification response notifies the CU control unit 323 that the security information 1 has been received.

  A command for requesting an initial vector value is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This initial vector value request command requests the initial vector value from the SC 325b. A response of an initial vector value response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the initial vector value response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the initial vector value. The initial vector value is information used for encrypting communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b, and includes an upstream vector value and a downstream vector value.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This communication key request command requests the SC 325b for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the communication key.

  The security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command instructs the security board information inquiry request 2 to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information inquiry request 2 is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information inquiry request 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323 of security board information inquiry information 2 including inquiry information of gaming machine control board information (main control board number and frame control board number). is there.

  The security board information notification 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information notification 2 command notifies the security information 2 to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information notification 2 response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information notification 2 response notifies the CU control unit 323 that the security information 2 has been received. The reception result included in the response of the security board information notification 2 response includes a gaming machine matching result that combines the matching result of the main control board and the matching result of the frame control board. Therefore, if the game machine verification result is “0x00”, the verification result of the main control board is OK, and the verification result of the frame control board is also OK, and if it is “0x01”, the verification result of the main control board is OK. The verification result for the frame control board indicates that the verification is in progress. When “0x02” is specified, the verification result for the main control board is being verified and the verification result for the frame control board is OK. This indicates that the verification result of the control board is being verified and the verification result of the frame control board is also being verified. Further, when the game machine verification result is “0x04”, the verification result of the main control board is OK and the verification result of the frame control board is NG, and when “0x05”, the verification result of the main control board is NG. The frame control board indicates that the verification result is OK. When “0x07”, the verification result of the main control board is NG and the verification result of the frame control board is being verified. When it is “0x08”, the main control This means that the verification result of the substrate is being verified and the verification result of the frame control substrate is NG. In this way, the gaming machine matching result is notified to the CU control unit 323 as information that individually represents the matching results of the main control board and the frame control board. In this way, since the verification results of the main control board and the frame control board acquired from the key management server 800 are output as information individually representing, it is easy to determine which control means has not been verified. Can do.

  The security board information notification 3 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This security board information notification 3 command notifies the security information 3 to the SC 325b. A response of the security board information notification 3 response is transmitted from the SC 325 b to the CU control unit 323. This response of the security board information notification 3 response notifies the CU control unit 323 that the security information 3 has been received.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b. This board state request command requests the board state and gaming machine state from the SC 325b. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323. The response of the board state response notifies the CU control unit 323 of the board state and the state of the gaming machine.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and a process executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 35, the process of starting up the CU control unit 323 when the power is turned on and the hall is installed will be described. FIG. 35 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall. In particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. When the power is first turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323 receives the board initial key A and the board initial key A message authentication code (specifically from the hall server) (from the hall server). For example, a valid key (for commercial / P shipment) such as a MAC key is also acquired. Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323 when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method in accordance with an encryption method such as DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or IDEA (International Data Encryption Algorithm).

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 then transmits a board connection request command including at least information on the unified store code, the gaming machine number (game machine number), and the current time to the SC 325b. The SC 325b holds the received unified store code, gaming machine number, and current time information. Further, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the board connection response including the connection result and security information to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 transmits the security information acquired from the SC 325b to the key management center.

  Specifically, the CU control unit 323 notifies the SC 325b of CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323, the SC 325b retains the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time, and when the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323 A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 35), which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires security information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325b.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and authentication is OK when the substrate initial key authentication is completed. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the security board information inquiry sequence using the board initial key obtained from the hall server as the encryption key, and the acquisition is OK when the security board information can be obtained. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange a communication key for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine control board information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, and inquire / notify the gaming machine control board information. The gaming machine control board information includes a main control board number, a frame control board number, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry 2 sequence will be described later. The security board information inquiry 3 sequence is performed only when there is security information 3 notified from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board information request command to the SC 325b to request the SC 325b for the state of the security board and the gaming machine. The SC 325b returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323. Note that the CU control unit 323 performs processing suitable for each board state when the security board cannot be operated. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323. .

  The CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the security board information inquiry 2 sequence when receiving a board state response response including the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation impossible). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the main control board number and the frame control board number cannot be normally acquired in the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation not possible). ) Including the response of the substrate state response including) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  The CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325b when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation disabled. That is, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation not possible to the CU control unit 323 when determining that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the security substrate information inquiry 2 sequence.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325b to the key management server via the CU control unit 323 and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3 makes a count history request to the P base 2, and the P base 2 returns a response of a count history response including the count history result, the count history 1, and the count history 2 to the CU 3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the power-on / normal startup process of the CU control unit 323 will be described. FIG. 36 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall. In particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. When the power is first turned on after the CU 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323 receives the board serial ID key, the board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to an encryption method such as DES, AES, IDEA or the like.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board connection request command including at least information on the unified store code, the gaming machine number, and the current time to the SC 325b. The SC 325b retains the received unified store code, game machine number, and current time information, and compares the received unified store code with the previously held unified store code. If the received unified store code does not match the previously held unified store code, the SC 325b transitions to the board initial key sequence. Further, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the board connection response including the connection result and security information to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 transmits the security information acquired from the SC 325b to the key management center. Next, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325b executes authentication with the communication control IC 325a when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b further acquires the gaming machine control board information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, and inquire / notify the gaming machine control board information. The gaming machine control board information includes a main control board number, a frame control board number, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry 2 sequence will be described later. The security board information inquiry 3 sequence is performed only when there is security information 3 notified from the CU control unit 323 to the SC 325b.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board information request command to the SC 325b to request the SC 325b for the state of the security board and the gaming machine. The SC 325b returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323. Note that the CU control unit 323 performs processing suitable for each board state when the security board cannot be operated. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323. .

  The CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the security board information inquiry 2 sequence when receiving a board state response response including the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation impossible). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the main control board number and the frame control board number cannot be normally acquired in the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation not possible). ) Including the response of the substrate state response including) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  The CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325b when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation disabled. That is, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation not possible to the CU control unit 323 when determining that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the security substrate information inquiry 2 sequence.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a process for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323 and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 37 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU 3 is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is a process in the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b that is not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated. The CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key as the encryption key. However, since the CU3 is not yet installed in the amusement hall because of the factory shipment stage, the CU control unit 323 cannot obtain the board initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board connection request command including at least information on the unified store code, the gaming machine number, and the current time to the SC 325b. The SC 325b holds the received unified store code, gaming machine number, and current time information. Further, the SC 325 b transmits a response of the board connection response including the connection result and security information to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 transmits the security information acquired from the SC 325b to the key management center. Next, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU control unit 323 requests the board shipping key used for testing the security board 325 from the SC 325b, and obtains the board shipping key from the SC 325b. To do. Then, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board shipping key authentication sequence using the board shipping key acquired from the SC 325b as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  If the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325b performs authentication with the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine control board information from the communication control IC 325a.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, and inquire / notify the gaming machine control board information. The gaming machine control board information includes a main control board number, a frame control board number, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry 2 sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 makes a communication test request to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 transmits a communication test response to the CU 3.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board information request command to the SC 325b to request the SC 325b for the state of the security board and the gaming machine. The SC 325b returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323. Note that the CU control unit 323 performs processing suitable for each board state when the security board cannot be operated. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323. .

  The CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the security board information inquiry 2 sequence when receiving a board state response response including the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation impossible). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the main control board number and the frame control board number cannot be normally acquired in the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation not possible). ) Including the response of the substrate state response including) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  The CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325b when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation disabled. That is, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation not possible to the CU control unit 323 when determining that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the security substrate information inquiry 2 sequence.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The CU3 that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall, and the first power-on sequence is the hall installation sequence described with reference to FIG. 35, and is executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325b. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using the challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests the challenge code from the SC 325b.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command, the SC 325b generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323 generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325b using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325b that has received the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires security information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325b, and transmits the acquired security information to the key management center.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In this case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC 325b becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG continuously n times, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared. After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325b does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325a, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39, in the state of the substrate initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 39 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key with respect to the SC 325b, calculates an algorithm (for example, an H-MAC algorithm using a hash function) with the MAC key, A board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command requesting authentication information is transmitted. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325b that receives the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or the board shipping key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and sends the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325b. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323. To do. The SC 325b returns an authentication result to the CU control unit 323 as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires security information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b is performed in the state of the board authentication key mode, which is a mode in which processing is performed using the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323 authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325b. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323 requests a challenge code from the SC 325b.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323 of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key), The generated response code is notified to the SC 325b by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 2 command, the SC 325b checks the response code (specifically, decrypts the response code using the board serial ID as a key and extracts the challenge code), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323 by the response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. If the check result is NG, the SC 325b notifies the CU control unit 323 that the check result is included in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires security information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325b, and transmits the acquired security information to the key management center.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325b in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the version information notification command, the SC 325b returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323 that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and issues the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting the authentication information to the SC 325b. Send. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is encrypted with the board authentication key, but may be encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key. Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 1 command, the SC 325b decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key and calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323, and the board authentication key authentication. Reply with response 1 response.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325b with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325b decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323. Then, the SC 325b returns an authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325b in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325b of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325b that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323 in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323 acquires security information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325b, and transmits the acquired security information to the key management center.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 41, first, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board information inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the security board information inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325b sends information (security board information inquiry information 1 including a board serial number, etc.) to be inquired to a host device (specifically, a key management server via a hall server) to the CU control unit. In order to notify 323, the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 is returned to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 to be returned is obtained by encrypting the security board information inquiry information 1 using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key. The encryption key is a key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323 and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as “secret key”). As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 makes an inquiry about the security board information inquiry information 1 to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) and waits for a response from the host device. Note that the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can execute processing of the next step (for example, a communication key exchange sequence) without waiting for a response from the host device while inquiring about security board information. The CU control unit 323 can execute processing related to the inquiry of the security board information inquiry information 1 by receiving the security board information (for example, the board serial ID key, the board authentication key A, the security information 1 and the like) from the host device. Become.

  When receiving the security board information from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the security board information to the SC 325b. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information notification command including the security information 1 as the inquiry result to the SC 325b. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325b confirms the inquiry number and responds to the security board information notification response to notify the CU control unit 323 that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Reply. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information notification response to be returned does not have to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, if the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323 stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits the security information acquired from the SC 325b to the higher-level device. Further, the CU control unit 323 acquires the security information of the board information inquiry and board information notification, and transmits the acquired security information to the key management center.

  Next, the security board information inquiry 2 sequence process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command for inquiring game machine control board information to the SC 325b. Note that the command of the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 to be transmitted does not need to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325b acquires gaming machine control board information from the communication control IC. After that, the SC 325b having received the command of the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine control board information, so the security board including the information of security board information inquiry information 2, inquiry information acquisition result = OK. A response to the information inquiry request 2 is returned to the CU control unit 323. In addition to the security board information inquiry information 2, the information returned from the SC 325b to the CU control unit 323 includes a gaming machine manufacturer code and a model code. The security board information inquiry information 2 includes a main control board number (main control chip ID), a frame control board number (payout control chip ID), etc., which are game machine control board information. The response of the security board information inquiry request 2 to be returned is that the main control board number and the frame control board number in the security board information inquiry information 2 are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted with the communication key. .

  After that, when the response of the returned security board information inquiry request 2 is received, the CU control unit 323 sends the main control board number and the frame control board number to the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 32). The security board information inquiry information 2 including this is inquired, and a response from the host device is waited for. During the inquiry of the security board information inquiry information 2, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can execute the next step process (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. . Since the inquiry of the security board information inquiry information 2 takes time (for example, about 2 hours), the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step without a response from the host device Process (business message processing with gaming machine). While the security board information inquiry information 2 is being queried, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, a request for the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 is issued again. Not.

  After that, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information inquiry information 2 from the host device, the CU control unit 323 notifies the security information 2 including the inquiry result to the SC 325b. Specifically, the security information 2 includes a gaming machine collation result that is an inquiry result of the security board information inquiry information 2. Note that the CU control unit 323 encrypts the security information 2 using the communication key as an encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification 2 command, the SC 325b returns a response of the security board information notification 2 response in order to notify the reception result and security information to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security board information notification 2 response to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323 transmits the security information acquired from the SC 325b to the host device. At the same time, the CU control unit 323 acquires the security information such as the inquiry information of the security board information inquiry information 2 and the gaming machine verification result, and transmits the acquired security information to the key management center.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing of the sequence of the board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the CU control unit 323 and the SC325b are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. If the board authentication key authentication is authentication NG, the SC 325b clears the board authentication key information as an authentication error.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b execute a board initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, and the security board information inquiry 2 are thereafter performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325b notifies the key management server 800 of an alarm of “board authentication key update error” indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. 44 is a case where the communication line between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 via the PIF circuit 326 (see FIG. 5) is disconnected.

  First, the P base 2 and the CU 3 are communicating via the PIF circuit 326. At this time, the P platform 2 and the CU 3 encrypt information to be communicated using a communication key. Thereafter, the communication line between the P platform 2 and the CU 3 is disconnected. The CU control unit 323 transmits a status information request command to the SC 325b. However, since the communication line between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 is disconnected, a response of the status information response to the status information request is returned from the SC 325b. Never happen. When the communication in which the response of the status information response to the status information request is not returned is continued n times, the CU control unit 323 sends a board status request command requesting the status of the security board 325 and the P base 2 to the SC 325b. Send. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b that has received the board state request command transmits a board state response response including information on the state of the security board 325 and the P platform 2 to the CU control unit 323. The response of the substrate state response to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. Information included in the response of the board state response includes a board state, an error state, a fraud detection state, installation change information, fraud detection information, and the like. For example, when a communication line disconnection occurs in communication via the PIF circuit 326, Bit0 = “1” (PIF line disconnection) in an error state included in the response of the board state response. When the store where the CU3 is installed is different, Bit2 = “1” (installation combination change detection) of the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response. In addition, when connected to the P board 2 connected to the game board development jig or the development unit before connection, Bit3 = “1” (illegal game machine) of the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response Connection detection).

  As long as the communication line disconnection continues in the communication via the PIF circuit 326, the board status request command is transmitted, and the error status Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) ) Is repeated between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b.

  When the communication line between the P unit 2 and the CU 3 via the PIF circuit 326 is restored, the SC 325b detects the restoration of the communication line, and in response to the transmitted board state request command, Bit 0 = " A response of the substrate state response including information of 0 ″ (no PIF line disconnection) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 acquires the gaming machine control board information of the P unit 2 connected from the communication control IC 325a. Thereafter, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, and inquire / check the security board information inquiry information 2 including the gaming machine control board information. Make a notification. The gaming machine control board information includes a main control board number, a frame control board number, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry 2 sequence is as described above.

  Next, the CU control unit 323 transmits a board information request command to the SC 325b to request the SC 325b for the state of the security board and the gaming machine. The SC 325b returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323. Note that the CU control unit 323 performs processing suitable for each board state when the security board cannot be operated. Specifically, the CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323. .

  The CU control unit 323 returns the processing to the security board information inquiry 2 sequence when receiving a board state response response including the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation impossible). That is, when the SC 325b determines that the main control board number and the frame control board number cannot be normally acquired in the security board information inquiry 2 sequence, the board state = security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 request (operation not possible). ) Including the response of the substrate state response including) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323.

  The CU control unit 323 repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325b when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation disabled. That is, the SC 325b transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation not possible to the CU control unit 323 when determining that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the security substrate information inquiry 2 sequence.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence for security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325b in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board information inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the security board information inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325b sends information (security board information inquiry information 1 including a board serial number, etc.) to be inquired to a host device (specifically, a key management server via a hall server) to the CU control unit. In order to notify 323, the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 is returned to the CU control unit 323. Note that the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 to be returned is obtained by encrypting the security board information inquiry information 1 using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key. The encryption key is a secret key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323 and the hall server. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 makes an inquiry about the security board information inquiry information 1 to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) and waits for a response from the host device. Note that the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can execute the process of the next step (for example, a communication key exchange sequence) without waiting for a response from the host device while inquiring about the security board information inquiry information 1.

  After that, the CU control unit 323, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, the CU 3 2 transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the second status. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325b that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine control board information of the P unit 2 via the communication control IC 325a.

  Then, the SC 325b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325b returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323 sends a board status request command to the SC 325b in order to request information for making an inquiry to the host apparatus. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board status request command, the SC 325b notifies the CU control unit 323 of information (security board information inquiry information 1 including the board serial number) that inquires to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Therefore, the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 is returned to the CU control unit 323 again. Note that the response of the security board information inquiry request 1 to be returned again also encrypts the security board information inquiry information 1 using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key. The encryption key is a secret key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323 and the hall server. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323 that has received the response of the substrate state response inquires the security substrate information inquiry information 1 to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) and waits for the response from the host device again.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the processing of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence for the security board information inquiry information 2.

  First, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command for inquiring game machine control board information to the SC 325b. Note that the command of the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 to be transmitted does not need to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325b acquires the gaming machine control board information from the communication control IC, and then receives the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command, and the SC 325b is a higher-level device (specifically, a key management server via a hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information to be inquired about (security board information inquiry information 2 including main control board number, frame control board number, gaming machine manufacturer code, model code, etc.), the security board information inquiry request 2 A response is returned to the CU control unit 323. The response of the security board information inquiry request 2 to be returned is that the main control board number and the frame control board number in the security board information inquiry information 2 are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted with the communication key. .

  Upon receiving the response of the security board information inquiry request 2, the CU control unit 323 receives the security board information inquiry information 2 including the main control board number and the frame control board number in the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). And waits for a response from the host device. During the inquiry of the security board information inquiry information 2, the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b can execute the next step process (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. .

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323 waits for the inquiry waiting time for the security board information inquiry information 2 before receiving the inquiry result of the security board information inquiry information 2 (game machine matching result, etc.) from the host device. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325b that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine control board information of the P unit 2 via the communication control IC 325a.

  Then, the SC 325b returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3. At this time, the SC 325b returns a status information response including “security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 transmission” to request an inquiry to the key management center of the security board information inquiry information 2 including the gaming machine control board information.

  In response to the inquiry request for the security board information inquiry information 2 described above, the CU control unit 323 transmits a security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command to the SC 325b in order to request information for making an inquiry to the host apparatus. Note that the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The SC 325b that has received the command of the security board information inquiry instruction notification 2 receives information (main control board number, frame control board number, etc.) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323 of information 2, a gaming machine manufacturer code, a model code, and the like, a response of the security board information inquiry request 2 is returned to the CU control unit 323 again. The response of the security board information inquiry request 2 to be returned again is that the main control board number and the frame control board number in the security board information inquiry information 2 are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted with the communication key. is there.

  Upon receiving the response of the security board information inquiry request 2, the CU control unit 323 receives the security board information inquiry information 2 including the main control board number and the frame control board number in the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). And waits again for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 46 will be described below.

  There is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 35) as a sequence executed after the CU 3 is received and installed in the amusement hall. This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 35). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 35) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. The board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships CU3 to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3 installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3 and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323 and the SC 325b, and business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key), and actual operation control is performed. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. The temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period of time (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 39, that is, even at a stage where the board has not yet been carried into the game arcade. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipment key request and the board shipment key response shown in FIG. 39 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko gaming machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 47, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “a game machine” or “S”) 2S is provided such that front door 2bS can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aS with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 47, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2S in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2S, the number of bets is set by using the game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with the winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2S is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 4 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7S is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on the S machine 2S, first, similarly to the P machine, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the S stand 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 4). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, a main control unit (S) that controls the S base 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2S is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aS by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S platform 2S is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aS in a state of being attached to the board mounting board for connecting the wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26 shown in FIG. 3, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2L, 2C, 2R) in the main body frame 2aS of the S base 2S. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b and the concave drawer connector 33 shown in FIG. 3, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, various operation switches (buttons), and the like.

  The S base 2S has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bS corresponding to the front frame 5 of the P base 2 and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aS and the board mounting board. The main control board is also connected in series.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 48 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 6 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 12, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (additional update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2 and CU3. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, the various detection switches 41a, 701, and 33, the firing control board 31, and the firing motor 18 in the front frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510 or 29S.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 or the display 29S, and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 or the display 29S and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (7) In this embodiment, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (8) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be similarly performed on the display 312.

  (9) In CU3, based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side, the stored game ball number is updated. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, for hall use). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801).

  (10) If a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (11) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (12) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU. Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (the prepaid balance, the possession ball, the accumulated ball) and the corresponding game points are deducted, the value deducted However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (17) In this embodiment, a key management server is installed in a key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (18) The CU control unit 323 receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns, then inserts the card into the original CU 3 again, and converts the holding ball into a game ball 125 by game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored by the CU 3 as a custody ball different from the gaming ball and the holding ball (also storing the C-ID and the insertion time), and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is a predetermined player with the gaming points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all gaming points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (21) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the number of balls and the gaming machine information as the holding ball, the gaming ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, and the like. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display device 54, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (22) As shown in FIG. 15, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period elapses, the display on the CU3 or P table 2 side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3 or P stand 2 side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 15 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 15 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2 or CU3. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not the counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2 or CU 3 or a card return operation again) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3 determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of the card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the number of game balls stored by the P stand 2 itself is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data allowing card return is transmitted to CU3, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, card return standby or card return prohibition is prohibited. The indicated data is transmitted to CU3.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when operation of a count button is detected, the P stand 2 determines whether card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2 transmits data indicating that to the CU 3. The CU 3 receiving it can be considered to determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the P table 2 detects the counting operation, while the CU 3 detects the card return operation, but the CU 3 detects the counting operation, while the P table 2 detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both the operations may be detected by the P stand 2 or the CU 3. In addition, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU 3 or the P stand 2, and one may be the CU 3 or the P stand 2.

  (23) Check whether there is a change in the number of holding balls or game balls on the CU or P stand, and if the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, notify the CU or P stand of that fact You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (24) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (25) In this embodiment, the CU 3 compares and determines the previous gaming machine information and the latest gaming machine information from the P stand 2 with the data stored by itself, and the data on the P stand 2 side is not improperly flooded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error determination is made on the CU3 side, such a situation is simply due to the exchange of CU3 (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3 after the exchange), and this is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3 is replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3 may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU 3 regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (26) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying a player's valuable value, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309 at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge slot 309 after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (27) In the present embodiment, in the counting history sequence, the P table 2 receives the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when receiving the card and the “store code” held by the P table 2 In the above description, the count history recovery process is performed when they match, and the count history recovery process is not performed when they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the counting history sequence, the P table 2 uses the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the card is received, You may comprise so that a match determination with the "store code" and "SC board ID" which are hold | maintained may be performed. Further, without performing the match determination of the “store code” in the counting history sequence, the P table 2 receives the “store code” and the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the card is received when the recovery request is received. At least one of “SC board ID” is matched with at least one of “store code” and “SC board ID” held by P platform 2, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In the case of disagreement, the game may be prohibited from being continued.

  (28) Moreover, you may make it attach an IC tag to a pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity. Furthermore, by associating the ball unit price (see FIG. 8) transmitted from the CU3 with the pachinko ball with the IC tag, it becomes possible to change the unit price for each ball, and the remaining number of balls and the scheduled time Accordingly, the ball unit price can be changed flexibly and the degree of freedom of the game by the player can be expanded.

  (29) When the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by the player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed. Further, when the firing strength is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed.

  (30) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25, the above-described firing intensity correction processing may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25 and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (31) In the present embodiment, the game information of P-unit 2 is collected by CU3, aggregated as changing information corresponding to one changing display, and is sent to the hall management computer as 20 changing information. The configuration to be described has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information of the P table 2 is collected as the game information collected by the CU 3 without being aggregated as the variable information corresponding to one variable display. May be transmitted to the hall management computer. The CU 3 transmits the face recognition information ID and the creation time of the face recognition information to the hall management computer in addition to the game information of the P stand 2. The management computer for halls, based on the game information of the variable display received from CU3, for each type of P stand 2 and face recognition information ID, the measurement count value, the number of shots, the occurrence time, and the firing stop switch count value Is counted.

  (32) In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the game information of the P table 2 is transmitted to the hall management computer via the CU3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information of the P unit 2 may be transmitted to the hall management computer without going through the CU3. Specifically, consider a hall management computer that is communicably connected to a plurality of P units 2. The hall management computer receives a plurality of types of game information including information indicating that the Fluctuating = ON from the P stand 2, and changing information after receiving the fluctuating = ON information from the P stand 2. For example, a storage unit that stores other game information such as the number of balls to be fired and the state of the firing stop switch received until the information of OFF is received. And when a memory | storage part = ON is received when starting communication with P stand 2, a memory | storage part does not memorize | store the game information received by the said fluctuation | variation display as information during fluctuation | variation. As a result, the hall management computer does not collect game information from the middle of the change, and therefore can suitably collect game information during the change of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the hall management computer further includes a specifying unit (such as a CPU) that can specify the number of times that the symbol of the variable display is stopped from the received game information. The storage unit does not store the game information received in the change display as the changing information when the specifying unit specifies that the number of symbol stops of the game information is at least once while the game state is changing. . As a result, the hall management computer does not collect game information having no credibility as the game information being changed, and therefore can suitably collect the game information during the change of the gaming machine.

  (33) In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which game information is collected while the gaming machine is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3 may be configured to collect game information corresponding to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Here, as a gaming state, from the “gaming machine state 2” and “gaming machine state 3” included in the gaming machine state of the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 other than during the fluctuation, the big hit state (big hit + CU3 can recognize states such as small hits, big hits for big balls, big hits for small balls, big hits during balls, etc., during big hits + during short hours, during certain changes, during short hours. Therefore, it is possible to collect game information according to each game state. Of course, the gaming state that can be recognized by the CU3 may include “reaching” in addition to the above example.

  As game information, in addition to the number of balls to be fired and the firing stop switch state, the starting ball, the big winning port, and the small winning port are included in the game information of the status information response transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 Information such as the number of balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of jackpots and the number of jackpots may be collected by the CU 3 according to the gaming state. In addition, since the response of the state information response includes “launch intensity signal”, “passing area signal”, “fluctuating signal”, and “handle touch signal”, these information are stored in accordance with the CU3. You may collect it. Of course, the game information collected by the CU 3 may include information totaled by the effect control board 15 (for example, the number of buttons operated at the time of effect) other than the above-described example.

  (34) In the present embodiment, as an example of illegal ball unit price detection processing at the time of an addition request (see FIG. 23), the ball unit price information stored in CU3 and the ball unit price information stored in P platform 2 are inconsistent. In this case, the configuration in which the CU 3 notifies the occurrence of an error using the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 has been described, but the configuration is not limited thereto. For example, when the unit price information of the two does not match, the configuration may be such that the P stand 2 does not go down in error but the CU 3 goes down in error. Needless to say, the configuration may be such that the P stand 2 and the CU 3 are error-down when the ball unit price information does not match. In addition, even if the unit price information of either P unit 2 or CU3 does not match, P unit 2 does not error down, but CU3 error down configuration P unit 2 and CU3 error down configuration It may be. Similarly, in the example of the illegal ball unit price detection process when the count button is pressed (see FIG. 24), the CU 3 may be configured to fail down when the ball unit price information does not match.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, as an example (refer FIG. 25) of the fraudulent unit price detection process at the time of CU replacement | exchange, when the unit price information which CU3 memorize | stores and the unit price information which P stand 2 memorize | stores does not correspond In addition, although the configuration in which the CU 3 is error-down has been described, the configuration is not limited thereto. For example, when the unit price information of the two does not match, the CU 3 may notify the occurrence of a unit price error indicating that the unit price is incorrect by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 according to a predetermined priority order. In this case, until the CU 3 determines that the ball unit price information stored in the CU 3 matches the ball unit price information stored in the P unit 2, information (for example, to return the P unit 2 to a playable state) The transmission of a recovery request for requesting previous game ball information, previous game information, etc.) may be continued. That is, the CU 3 may continue at least the process for returning. Further, if the P stand 2 is a pachinko gaming machine that is not an enclosed circulation type, the pachinko gaming machine waits for a return process (for example, continues to wait for input of recovery information on the display). Similarly, in the example of illegal ball unit price detection processing (see FIG. 26) at the time of replacement of the P units, when the ball unit price information of both does not match, the ball that indicates that the unit price is incorrect according to a predetermined priority order. The configuration may be such that the occurrence of a unit price error is notified by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312. Also in this case, the CU 3 may continue to transmit a recovery request (processing for returning) to the P unit 2 until the coin unit price information of both coincides.

  (35) In the present embodiment, in FIG. 25, an example of processing for detecting the unauthorized unit price when the new CU3 replaced in place of the failed CU3 is communicably connected to the P stand 2 has been described. However, the configuration is not limited thereto. For example, even when a failed CU3 is repaired (or the ball unit price has been changed illegally) and the same CU3 is communicably connected to the P stand 2 (that is, when the CU3 is not replaced) The same processing as in FIG. 25 is performed. Note that, for example, even when the failed P base 2 is repaired and the same P base 2 is communicably connected to the CU 3 (that is, when the P base 2 is not replaced), the same processing as in FIG. Is done.

  (36) In the present embodiment, in FIGS. 23 and 24, when it is determined that the unit price information stored in CU3 and the unit price information stored in P stand 2 are inconsistent, The operation of the button may be invalidated, and the P base 2 may be configured to invalidate the operation of the counting button.

  (37) In this embodiment, in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the ball unit price information stored in the CU 3 and the ball unit price information stored in the P stand 2 do not match when the ball lending button is pressed and the count button is pressed, respectively. Although the configuration for determining whether or not the ball lending button and the counting button are not pressed has been described, the determination may be performed. Then, as a result of the determination, if it is determined that the unit prices of the balls are inconsistent, the unit price error notification may or may not be executed immediately. When the unit price error notification is not executed immediately, the unit price error notification may be executed when, for example, a predetermined operation (depression of a ball lending button or a count button) is received. That is, the timing of the determination and the timing of the unit price error notification may be the same or different.

  (38) In FIGS. 23 and 24 of the present embodiment, since the unit price information stored in the CU 3 is included in the status information request command and notified to the P base 2, the P base 2 side The configuration for determining whether or not the unit price is the same has been described. Further, the description has been given of the point that the unit price stored in the P stand 2 is not outputted to the outside other than notifying the CU 3 at the time of the recovery response, thereby ensuring the security so that the unit price is not changed illegally. However, for example, if the ball unit price information is encrypted and the security can be secured so that the unit price is not changed illegally, the unit price information stored in the P unit 2 is used as a response to the status information response. It may be configured to notify the CU3 and determine whether or not the unit price is the same on the CU3 side.

  In addition, in the processing for detecting the illegal unit price at the time of CU replacement or P unit replacement (see FIGS. 25 and 26), the information on the unit price stored in the P unit 2 is included in the response of the recovery response to CU3. Therefore, a configuration has been described in which it is determined whether or not the unit price of the balls matches on the CU3 side. However, for example, if the security can be secured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally by encrypting the ball unit price information, the unit price information stored in the CU3 is included in the command of the recovery request. The configuration may be such that the P unit 2 is notified and it is determined whether or not the unit price is the same on the P unit 2 side.

  (39) In the present embodiment, in FIGS. 23 to 26, when the unit price information of both (CU3 and P stand 2) does not match, error notification is performed only on the CU3 side. A configuration may also be adopted in which an error is notified by an abnormality notification lamp or the like on the stand 2 side.

  (40) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the unit price of the ball is illegally changed in one of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 has been basically described. Here, for example, when the ball unit price on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side is 1 yen initially, the case where the ball unit price is changed from 1 yen to 4 yen on the CU3 side and a ball unit price error occurs. Think. In this case, when the ball unit price is changed from 4 yen to 1 yen on the CU3 side, the unit price error is eliminated because both unit prices match. However, even when the ball unit price is changed from 1 yen to 4 yen on the P platform 2 side, the unit price error of both units will be solved, so that the unit price error will be eliminated.

  In order to prevent such a situation, the apparatus on the side where the unit price has been changed may be configured such that the unit price error is eliminated only when the original unit price is restored. In the case described above, even if the unit price is changed from 1 yen to 4 yen on the P stand 2 side where the unit price has not been changed when the unit price error occurs, the unit price error is not resolved. That is, the ball unit price error is eliminated only when the unit price is changed from 4 yen to 1 yen on the CU3 side where the unit price has been changed at the time when the unit price error occurs. In addition, CU3 and P stand 2 memorize | store the "previous ball unit price information", and by comparing the last ball unit price information with the current ball unit price information, whether the unit unit price was changed in the own apparatus. Can be determined.

  (41) In the present embodiment, at the timing when the ball unit price is notified from the higher-level device, the CU 3 stores and sets information on the notified ball unit price (CU-side unit unit price) in the RAM of the CU control unit 323. When the number of game balls is 0 (zero) balls, the P table 2 stores information on the ball unit price (P unit side unit price) included in the message notified from the CU 3 in the RAM of the payout control board 17, Although the configuration to be set has been described, the configuration is not limited thereto. For example, by transmitting information on the ball unit price set by a predetermined operation in one device (for example, P stand 2) to the other device (for example, CU3) together with a command for setting a predetermined unit price, CU3 May be configured to store information on the received unit price. As described above, when the CU 3 receives the ball unit price information together with the ball unit price setting command from the P stand 2, the received ball unit price information is stored in the ball stored by itself. Even if the unit price information is different from the unit price information, the received unit price information is reset without determining that it is illegal.

  (42) In the present embodiment, when changing the unit price set for the P unit 2, the configuration in which the number of game balls stored in the P unit 2 is set to 0 (zero) balls is described. I can't. For example, when changing the unit price set for CU3, the number of game balls stored in the P stand 2 may be set to 0 (zero) balls. Moreover, when changing the ball unit price set to CU3 or P stand 2, it is good also as a structure which makes the number of game balls memorize | stored in CU3 and P stand 2 0 (zero) ball.

  (43) In the present embodiment, information (for example, error occurrence time, identification information of CU3, error code, error) that allows the CU3 to specify the content of the error with respect to the host device (for example, the hall server 801). However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, the CU 3 transmits information on a situation in which the unit price of fraud has occurred to the upper unit (for example, the unit unit price of the CU 3 is invalid and the unit unit price of the P unit 2 is normal). Based on the information, the situation where fraud of the unit price has occurred may be aggregated and output possible.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control board, 26 game board, 54, 312 display, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit, 321 Lending button, 322 Return button, 161 Main control unit, 325 Display control unit, 171 Payout control unit, 323 CU control unit.

Claims (2)

A gaming system comprising a gaming machine in which a game is performed and a gaming device connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes gaming machine side storage means for storing gaming machine side unit price information of gaming value for playing a game,
The gaming device includes gaming device side storage means for storing gaming device side unit price information of a gaming value for playing with a gaming machine connected to the gaming device,
When the conversion instruction for converting the gaming value stored in the gaming machine into the gaming value stored in the gaming device is received, the gaming machine side unit price information matches the gaming device side unit price information. Determination means for determining whether or not,
A gaming system comprising: a non-coincidence process execution means for executing a mismatch process when the determination means determines that the gaming machine side unit price information and the gaming apparatus side unit price information do not match. A gaming device connected to a gaming machine where a game is played,
Storage means for storing game device side unit price information of a game value for playing on a gaming machine connected to the gaming device;
A conversion instruction for converting the gaming value stored in the gaming machine into the gaming value stored in the gaming device is received, and the gaming machine side unit price information stored in the gaming machine and the gaming device side unit price information are A gaming device comprising: a non-coincidence process execution means for executing a mismatch process when it is determined that there is a mismatch.

Images